1320ct basic operator’s handbook table of …keekles.org/.../files/1320/1320ct_v3x.pdf · 1320ct...
TRANSCRIPT
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
1
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
1320CT BASIC OPERATOR’S HANDBOOK
TABLE OF CONTENTS
LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HANDBOOK GUIDE 11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1 HANDBOOK STRUCTURE AND CONFIGURATION CHECK 13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1 General information 13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2 Handbook applicability 13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3 Purpose of the handbook 14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4 Handbook Structure 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5 Handbook configuration check 16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.5.1 List of the editions and of modified parts 16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5.2 Notes on Ed.01 16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 PRODUCT-RELEASE HANDBOOKS 17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 SAFETY NORMS AND LABELS 19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1 First aid for electric shock 19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2 Norms and labels 21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 GENERAL ON ALCATEL CUSTOMER DOCUMENTATION 23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1 Products, product-releases, versions and Customer Documentation 23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2 Handbook supply to Customers 23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3 Aims of standard Customer Documentation 23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4 Handbook Updating 24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.1 Changes introduced in the same product-release (same handbook P/N) 24. . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.2 Supplying updated handbooks to Customers 24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.3 Changes due to a new product-release 24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.5 Customer documentation supply on CD–ROM 25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.1 Contents, creation and production of a CD–ROM 25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.2 Use of the CD–ROM 26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.3 CD–ROM identification 26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.4 CD–ROM updating 26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5 ACRONYMS AND GLOSSARY OF TERMS 27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1 Acronyms 27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2 Glossary of terms 29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ED DATE CHANGE NOTE APPRAISAL AUTHORITY ORIGINATOR
01 040220 G. ZANGRANDO ITAVE P. GHELFI ITAVE
1320CTVersion 3.xBASIC OPERATOR’S HDBK
C. FAVERO
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
2
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
INTRODUCTION 33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF THE CRAFT TERMINAL 35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1 Introduction 35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2 Craft Terminal characteristics 40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2.1 Craft Terminal Interface 40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2.2 Computer hardware configuration 40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2.3 Computer software configuration 41. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.3 Craft Terminal main functionalities 42. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3.1 System management 42. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3.2 Security management 42. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3.3 Construction (network topology) management 42. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3.4 Network element management 42. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3.5 Software management 43. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3.6 Alarm management 43. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 CRAFT TERMINAL GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACE PRINCIPLES 45. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1 Generalities 45. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2 Keyboard 46. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.1 The different keys 46. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.2 Location and insertion cursor 46. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3 Mouse 47. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3.1 Mouse buttons 47. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3.2 Mouse functionalities 47. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3.3 Mouse pointer signification 47. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4 Windows 48. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4.1 Dimensions and layout 48. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4.2 Client area and Window titles 48. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4.3 Window menu 49. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4.4 Scroll bars 50. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.5 Buttons 51. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5.1 Push buttons 51. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5.2 Check buttons 52. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5.3 Radio buttons 52. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5.4 Option buttons 53. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.6 Menus 54. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6.1 Menu bars 54. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6.2 Pull down menus 55. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6.3 Cascading menus 56. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6.4 Pop–up menus 56. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6.5 Unavailable menu items and Menu item Selection 57. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6.6 Mnemonics 57. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6.7 Graphical User Interface (GUI) Key accelerators 58. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.7 Entry boxes 60. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7.1 Description and Definition 60. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7.2 Syntactic guidelines 61. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.8 Dialogue boxes 62. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.8.1 Generalities 62. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.8.2 List dialogue boxes 62. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.8.3 Message and Confirmation dialogue boxes 64. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SOFTWARE INSTALLATION 67. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 SOFTWARE INSTALLATION 69. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1 Scope of the procedure 69. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
3
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
3.2 Start–up of the Personal Computer 69. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3 Installation Phases of the craft terminal management SW 70. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.1 Scope of the procedure 70. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3.2 Installation phases 70. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3.3 De–installation phases 106. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4 Craft terminal configuration 113. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4.1 Scope of the procedure 113. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4.2 Configuration issues 113. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4.3 PC hostname 114. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4.4 CT configuration 116. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4.5 Lower Layer IP 120. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4.6 Communication Protocol (TCP/IP) 120. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4.7 Communication with NE 153. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4.8 Screen setting 157. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5 Start–up of the Craft Terminal management software 159. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5.1 Scope of the procedure 159. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5.2 Start–up of the software 159. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GETTING STARTED 161. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 GETTING STARTED 163. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1 Scope 163. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2 System access 164. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.1 Logging into the system 164. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.2 Start–up of the Craft Terminal application 165. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.3 Password modification 166. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.4 Locking the screen 168. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.5 Logging out from the system 170. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3 Access to the main functionalities 171. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.1 EML construction management 172. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.2 Element management 173. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.3 ISA board population 176. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.4 Administration management 178. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.5 NE Profile management 178. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.6 Alarm management 181. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.7 Quitting the Craft Terminal applications 185. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4 Views description 186. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.1 Network Element Synthesis view description 186. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.2 Equipment views description 187. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.5 Navigation 196. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.1 Network Element Synthesis (Network Topology) views 196. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.2 Equipment views 199. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.3 Open view in window 204. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.6 NE Alarms and NE Status 205. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6.1 NE Alarm 205. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.7 Utilities 207. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8 On–Line documentation 208. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.8.1 Overview 208. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8.2 Help About 209. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8.3 Help Craft Terminal 210. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8.4 Help on help 211. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8.5 Help on context 212. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8.6 Glossary 213. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8.7 About help 215. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
4
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
4.8.8 Tutorial 216. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8.9 Navigation principles 217. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EML CONSTRUCTION 219. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5 EML CONSTRUCTION 221. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1 Scope 221. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2 Generalities on the network element synthesis 222. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2.1 Presentation 222. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.2 Use of the platform in the network 225. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.3 General rules using the platform 226. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3 Managing the network topology 231. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3.1 Creating the Network Topology 232. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3.2 Maps/submaps/NE Management 243. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3.3 Network Element Synthesis “View Area” managing 248. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.4 Supervisioning the Network elements 255. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4.1 NE management states 256. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4.2 Supervising NEs 258. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4.3 Login a Network Element 260. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4.4 Changing the address inside a Network Element 262. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4.5 Show NE Alarms 264. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.5 Using Craft Terminal Environment 265. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5.1 Process Control 265. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5.2 List Software 267. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5.3 Backup 269. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5.4 Restore 271. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5.5 ANTP Configuration 272. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.6 Administrating files 278. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.6.1 Software Administration 278. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.6.2 Mib copies 285. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.7 Alcatel program tools 293. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.7.1 Parameter tools 295. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.7.2 NECTAS option 296. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.8 Slave NE Management 315. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8.1 Create Slave NE 315. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8.2 Delete Slave NE 319. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8.3 Master NE Supervision 321. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
5
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES
FIGURESFigure 1. Example of network management architecture 37. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2. Example of management of an SDH network with SDH and ATM traffic 38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3. Software products installation 39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4. Example of a window layout. 48. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 5. Window menu options. 49. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6. Scroll bar components. 50. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 7. Examples of push buttons. 51. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 8. Examples of check buttons. 52. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 9. Examples of radio buttons. 52. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 10. Example of Option Button. 53. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 11. Example of Option Button. 53. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 12. Window view showing the menu bar. 54. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 13. Window view with Pull down menu. 55. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 14. Window view with Cascading menu. 56. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 15. Unselectable menu items. 57. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 16. Highlighted menu item indicating selection. 57. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 17. Example of Keys accelerator in the Transmission view 58. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 18. Example of a dialogue box having Entry Boxes. 60. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 19. Single List box. 62. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 20. Multiple List box. 63. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 21. After choosing in a Multiple list box. 64. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 22. Error dialogue box. 64. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 23. Work in progress dialogue box. 65. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 24. Question dialogue box. 65. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 25. Information dialogue box. 66. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 26. Intermediate screen 71. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 27. Selecting installation procedure. 72. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 28. Craft Terminal master setup list 73. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 29. Selecting component to install 73. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 30. Java licence agreement acceptance 75. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 31. Java component installation: choose destination folder 76. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 32. Java component download 77. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 33. Install with more recent version confirmation (example) 78. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 34. Craft Terminal kernel Setup – Maintenance setup dialog 78. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 35. Repair CT–K maintenance procedure (example) 79. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 36. Internet browser choice 80. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 37. CT–K Customization 80. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 38. Selecting installation mode with previous version already installed software 81. . . . . . . . . Figure 39. Un–install evolution procedure (example) 81. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 40. Information on the Info Model Craft Terminal Platform applicative to install. 82. . . . . . . . . . Figure 41. Component installation: choose destination folder 83. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 42. Demo bitmap during installation: example 84. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 43. Netscape Navigator or Internet Explorer selection 85. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 44. USM recovery question box 85. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 45. USM security data files recovery selection dialog box 86. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 46. Customization phase 87. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 47. CT–K–Add on re–install question 87. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 48. Installation completed. 88. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 49. Lower Layer Manager installation, first view. 89. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 50. Lower Layer Manager installation, select component view. 90. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 51. “Lower Layer Manager” and “Lower Layers IP Manager installation guide” selection 91.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
6
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
Figure 52. Lower layer manager setting view 91. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 53. Alcatel Virtual Network card for Lower Layers Help 92. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 54. Common Adm Usm Destination Location 93. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 55. Common ADM USM: example of copying files automatic sequence 94. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 56. Example of Specific NE management software component to install 95. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 57. 1320NX (NECTAS) installation, first view. 96. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 58. 1320NX (NECTAS) installation, select component. 96. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 59. 1320NX (NECTAS) installation, option 97. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 60. 1320NX (NECTAS) installation, choose the directory. 97. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 61. 1320NX (NECTAS) installation percentage 98. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 62. 1320NX (NECTAS) installation completed. 98. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 63. QB3*Mediation Function installation, choose directory 99. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 64. QB3* Mediation Function installation percentage 100. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 65. QB3* MF Installation selection 100. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 66. QB3* MF Installation directory 101. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 67. QB3* MF End Setup 101. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 68. QB3* MF: press any key to continue 102. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 69. QB3* MF: Installation completed 102. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 70. Q3CT–K–ADD–ON 103. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 71. Quit the installation 104. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 72. 1320CT short–key 104. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 73. Intermediate screen 106. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 74. Selecting de–installation procedure. 107. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 75. Selecting component to de–install 108. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 76. Delete confirmation (example) 108. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 77. Delete completed (example) 109. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 78. Quit the installation 109. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 79. Add / Remove Programs icon selection 110. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 80. Add / Remove Programs view (examples) 111. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 81. Delete confirmation (example) 112. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 82. Delete completed (example) 112. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 83. USM Customization command 114. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 84. CT–K customization command 115. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 85. Q3 ADD ON Customization 115. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 86. Selecting Alcatel Lower Layers settings icon 116. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 87. Defining Alcatel Lower Layers settings data (Serial Port / IP tunnel) 116. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 88. Ethernet configuration (example) 117. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 89. IP Static Routing Configuration (example) 118. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 90. OSI over IP configuration (example) 118. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 91. C.T.–> N.E. communication via IP Network 119. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 92. Lower Layers IP Manager Setup 120. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 93. Selecting Modems icon WINDOWS NT 121. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 94. Don’t detect my modem... selection. 122. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 95. Modem type selection 122. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 96. Ports selection 123. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 97. Finish modem installation 124. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 98. Close Modem installation 124. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 99. Selecting Modems icon with WINDOWS 2000 125. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 100. Location information 125. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 101. Phone and Modem Option 126. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 102. Install New modem 126. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 103. Modem type selection 127. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 104. Ports selection 127. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 105. Finish Modem installation 128. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 106. Close Modem installation 128. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
7
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
Figure 107. Selecting Network icon. 129. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 108. Selecting Add Services in the list. 129. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 109. Remote Access Service selection 130. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 110. NT CD–ROM request. 130. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 111. Display the service configuration 131. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 112. RAS protocol access 131. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 113. TCP/IP selection 132. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 114. Check computer name with WINDOWS NT 133. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 115. Check services with RAS 134. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 116. Check TCP/IP protocol 135. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 117. Check host name on DNS of Properties 136. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 118. Check WINS Address of Properties 137. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 119. Check Routing of Properties 138. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 120. Check RAS in Bindings tab. 139. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 121. Check Adapters tab. 140. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 122. Selecting Network icon 141. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 123. Check Adapter on Network 142. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 124. Check TCP/IP Protocol on Network 143. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 125. Check TCP/IP Properties 144. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 126. Check DSN 145. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 127. Check WINS Address 146. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 128. System properties 147. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 129. Hardware Profiles of System Properties 148. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 130. Copy profile 148. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 131. Hardware Profiles of System Properties with ”NoNetwork” 149. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 132. ”NoNetwork” properties – 1 150. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 133. ”NoNetwork” properties – 2 151. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 134. Serial Communication NOT OK 153. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 135. Serial Communication OK 156. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 136. Screen setting –1 157. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 137. Screen setting – 2 158. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 138. 1320CT software start–up 159. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 139. Login panel view (example) 164. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 140. Software start–up (example) 165. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 141. Windows Security (example) 166. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 142. Password modification procedure (example) 167. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 143. Unlock the workstation WINDOWS NT 168. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 144. Unlock the computer with WINDOWS 2000 169. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 145. Network Element Synthesis screen with plugged NE. 171. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 146. Example of Map. 172. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 147. Starting supervision from the Network Element Synthesis views. 173. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 148. Login a NE. 173. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 149. Login and Password dialog box 174. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 150. Network Element view (example) 174. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 151. ISA board management view (example) 175. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 152. Realign ISA board population 176. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 153. ISA boards 177. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 154. Login and Password dialog box 178. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 155. NE User Management window 178. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 156. Create new User in this NE 179. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 157. Example of new user creation 179. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 158. Remove user 180. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 159. Change password 180. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 160. Alarm Surveillance option menu 181. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 161. Alarm Management view. 181. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
8
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
Figure 162. Show NE alarms option 182. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 163. Alarms sublist 182. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 164. Alarm formatter 183. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 165. Choose AS input file to format view 183. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 166. Alarms formatter output directory 184. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 167. Formatted alarms view. 184. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 168. Quitting the Craft Terminal application 185. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 169. First view: Network Element Synthesis view. 186. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 170. NE view. 188. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 171. Control panel alarm icon shapes. 189. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 172. Example of the contents of the message area. 192. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 173. Example of a NE Board view. 193. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 174. Example of a detailed port view. 194. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 175. Start the Supervision on a NE. 196. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 176. Show Equipment to open the USM view. 197. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 177. Login and Password dialog box 197. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 178. Opening the Alarm view from Network Topology views. 198. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 179. Unsaved changes warning 198. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 180. Exiting the application: confirm request 198. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 181. Opening a Board view. 199. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 182. Opening an Alarm view. 200. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 183. Opening an ELM view. 200. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 184. Opening a specific NE view. 201. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 185. Opening a specific Port view by using the View menu. 202. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 186. Opening a specific Port view by using the Board menu. 203. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 187. Opening a specific NE view. 203. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 188. Opening a view in a window 204. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 189. Alarm representation in the Equipment views. 206. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 190. Obtaining About help. 209. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 191. About Network Element Synthesis 209. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 192. Obtaining help on Craft Terminal. 210. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 193. Obtaining help on help. 211. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 194. Obtaining context sensitive help. 212. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 195. Obtaining the glossary. 213. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 196. Glossary help window 214. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 197. Selecting About of help. 215. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 198. Obtaining help home page (Introduction) 216. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 199. Example of help tutorial 216. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 200. Navigation bar 217. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 201. Network Element Synthesis screen organization. 225. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 202. Selecting with pop–up menu 226. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 203. Menu options flow chart (part1) 227. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 204. Menu options flow chart (part2) 228. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 205. Menu options flow chart (part3) 229. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 206. Menu options flow chart (part4) 230. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 207. Creating a new Map. 232. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 208. Selecting the Map <unnamed> 233. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 209. Selecting Rename 233. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 210. Renaming the map 233. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 211. Insert a description for the map 234. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 212. Plugged NE in a map of the view area (Q3 NE example) 235. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 213. Creating a Q3 NE 236. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 214. NE Address 236. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 215. Example of NE Address 237. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 216. Q3 NE created in a map of the view area 238. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
9
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
Figure 217. SNMP Network Element creation 241. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 218. NE Address setting (empty) 242. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 219. Example of NE address setting 242. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 220. Open a Map 243. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 221. Select a Map 243. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 222. Save a Map 244. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 223. Delete a Submap 245. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 224. Display and change NE address 246. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 225. Change NE Address settings 246. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 226. Removing a NE from the Network Element Synthesis 247. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 227. Obtaining multiple symbols view. 249. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 228. Structure of the Map view (left side of the view area) 250. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 229. Structure of the “list of details” view for Map/Submaps (right side of the view area) 251. . Figure 230. Structure of the list of details view for NE (right side of the view area) 252. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 231. Warning and left border led symbols in the view area. 254. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 232. Showing data relative to the left border symbols 254. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 233. Evolution of the NE management states. 257. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 234. Starting supervision from the Network Element Synthesis views. 258. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 235. Stopping supervision from the Network Element Synthesis views. 259. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 236. Login a NE. 260. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 237. Login and Password dialog box 260. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 238. Network Element views after Login (example). 261. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 239. Enter the option to set the address inside a NE. 262. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 240. Modifying NE address inside a NE: selection. 262. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 241. Modifying NE address inside a NE: other settings 263. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 242. Modifying NE address inside a NE: change Location Name. 263. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 243. Show NE Alarms 264. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 244. Network Element Alarm Surveillance views (example). 264. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 245. Selecting Process Control 265. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 246. Example of Process Control view 266. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 247. Selecting List Software 267. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 248. List Software example 268. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 249. Backup of NES data 269. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 250. Select directory for backup 269. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 251. Backup file denomination 270. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 252. Restore NES data 271. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 253. Select directory for restore 271. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 254. Shortcut to ANTP settings 272. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 255. Select the ANTP Configuration options 272. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 256. ANTP: usual CT scenario 273. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 257. ANTP: Time Mismatch report 274. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 258. Selecting the NE Time option in the USM. 275. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 259. NE Time dialogue box in the USM. 275. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 260. ANTP setting selection 276. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 261. ANTP setting 277. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 262. SWP Administration menu 279. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 263. Software Package Administration view 279. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 264. SDH software package installation 280. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 265. ATM software package installation (example) 281. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 266. OMSN enhanced software package creation (part A) 282. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 267. OMSN enhanced software package creation (part B) 283. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 268. Enhanced software package (SDH + ATM) 284. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 269. Mib copies: save data with EML–USM view. 285. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 270. Mib copies: save to disk with Network Element Synthesis view. 286. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 271. Mib copies: showing the folder with the saved files. 286. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
10
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
Figure 272. Mib copies: select the file to be saved. 287. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 273. Mib copies: select the path where to save. 288. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 274. Mib copies: saving confirmation message. 288. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 275. Mib copies: load from disk with Network Element Synthesis view. 289. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 276. Mib copies: select the directory containing the fie to be copied from disk. 290. . . . . . . . . . Figure 277. MIB copy: directory selected 291. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 278. MIB copy: file selection 291. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 279. Mib copies: coping confirmation message. 291. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 280. Mib copies: save data with EML–USM view. 292. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 281. Parameter tool 295. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 282. Operator identifier and password 296. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 283. All Element selection 297. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 284. QB3* Network Element management view 297. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 285. Application choice for QB3* Network Element management 298. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 286. NECTAS management principle scheme 299. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 287. QB3* Network Element management: alarms, status and control application 300. . . . . . . Figure 288. QB3* Network Element management: local configuration application list 301. . . . . . . . . . . Figure 289. QB3* Network Element management: Local Configuration 302. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 290. QB3* Network Element management: OS configuration table 303. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 291. QB3* Network Element management: MF Configuration 304. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 292. QB3* Network Element management: R–ECT configuration (choice of elements) 305. . . Figure 293. QB3* Network Element management: R–ECT configuration 306. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 294. Administrative application – Date selection 307. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 295. Administrative – Date 307. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 296. Mediation Function selection 308. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 297. Application choice for Mediation Function 309. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 298. Mediation Function: alarms, status and control application 309. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 299. Mediation Function: local configuration application list 310. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 300. Mediation Function: OS configuration table 311. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 301. Mediation Function: Local Q2 interface definition 312. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 302. Mediation Function: NE selection 313. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 303. Mediation Function: Slave NE address configuration table 314. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 304. Map with master NE 315. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 305. Create slave NE 316. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 306. Select Slave NE index 316. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 307. Select Slave NE type release 317. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 308. Slave NE creation in the Map 318. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 309. Example of Slave NEs creation in the Map 318. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 310. Remove Slave NE 319. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 311. After deleting the only one Slave NE in a Submap 320. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 312. Master NE Start Supervision 321. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 313. Master NE Stop Supervision 322. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 314. Stop Supervision result 322. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TABLESTable 1. Handbook configuration check 16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 2. Handbooks common to Alcatel Network Elements using 1320CT platform 17. . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3. Documentation on CD–ROM 17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 4. Handbooks related to the specific Network Element 18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 5. Board state icon 191. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
11
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
HANDBOOK GUIDE
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
12
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
13
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
1 HANDBOOK STRUCTURE AND CONFIGURATION CHECK
1.1 General information
WARNING
ALCATEL makes no warranty of any kind with regards to this manual, and specifically disclaims theimplied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. ALCATEL will not be liablefor errors contained herein or for damages, whether direct, indirect, consequential, incidental, orspecial, in connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of this material.
NOTICE
The product specification and/or performance levels contained in this document are for informationpurposes only and are subject to change without notice. They do not represent any obligation on thepart of ALCATEL.
COPYRIGHT NOTIFICATION
The technical information of this manual is the property of ALCATEL and must not be copied,reproduced or disclosed to a third party without written consent.
1.2 Handbook applicability
PRODUCT ANV P/N FACTORY P/N
1320CT ––– –––
PRODUCT RELEASE VERSION (N.B.) ANV P/N FACTORY P/N
1320CT ––– 3.X ––– –––
This handbook is not applied to a specific Network Element product-release.
It is a common handbook for several equipment of different product-releases using 1320CT platform, andis dedicated to Network Elements supporting the Info Model Craft Terminal management, starting fromNetwork Release 5.
The use of this handbook is indicated in the list of the ”Handbooks related to the specific softwareapplication”, in the Technical and Operator’s Handbook of the Network Element.
Being the document dedicated to a set of equipment, screens are inserted as ”example” and can beextracted from any of the referred equipment.
N.B. See NOTES FOR HANDBOOKS RELEVANT TO SOFTWARE APPLICATIONS on page 24.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
14
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
1.3 Purpose of the handbook
This handbook describes the operations concerning commissioning and operation that the operators mustcarry out as indicated by the software application(s) referred to in this handbook (see para. 1.2 on page13).
This handbook must be used together with the associated Technical and Operator’s Handbook and doesnot replicate information contained into them.In particular, all cautions relevant to safety, rules for EMC and ESD, as well as warnings regardingoperations that may cause damages to the equipment, are not duplicated here, but must be retrieved fromthe Technical Handbook.
When using this handbook it is assumed that the Operators know:
• the structure (hardware composition) and all the possible operating modes of the equipment(product-release) this handbook refers to.
• how to use a PC and the Windows ambient applications
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
15
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
1.4 Handbook Structure
This handbook has been edited according to the Alcatel standardized “drawing–up guides” complying withsuch suggestion.
This handbook is divided into the following main topics as described in the table of contents:
HANDBOOK GUIDE: It contains general information about structure and use of thehandbook, and safety norms on using the equipments.
INTRODUCTION: The Introduction Manual includes the following chapters:
GENERAL DESCRIPTION: The Craft Terminal is introduced and the characteristicsdescribed. The main functionalities are listed and brieflydescribed.
GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACE PRINCIPLES:
The Elements of the user interface that you will most frequentlydeal with are examined in detail.
SOFTWARE INSTALLATION: The aim of this document is to describe the installation in theCraft Terminal of the software products referred to the NetworkElement.
GETTING STARTED: This document aims at introducing the Craft Terminal workingenvironment, to the users of the system, in terms of gettingaccess to the system, the environment utilities, the existingfunctionalities and navigation through the system.
EML CONSTRUCTION: The aim of this document is to describe the operations relatedto the management of Maps, Submaps and symbols within theCraft Terminal. The actions leading to the creation, edition,deletion, storage and listing of Maps shall be indicated. Thenavigation through the necessary sequences of the Mapsneeded to create the TN will be described.
Sufficient details on the addition, the removal and the selectionof Network Element symbols are given to enable an easycharacterization of the network.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
16
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
1.5 Handbook configuration check
1.5.1 List of the editions and of modified parts
Legend
n = new part p =proposal partm = modified part d =deleted part
Table 1. Handbook configuration check
EDITION 01 02 03 04 05 06
HANDBOOK GUIDE
INTRODUCTION
1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION n
2. GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACE PRINCIPLES n
SOFTWARE INSTALLATION
3. SOFTWARE INSTALLATION n
GETTING STARTED
4. GETTING STARTED n
EML CONSTRUCTION
5. EML CONSTRUCTION n
Note: the sections relevant to HANDBOOK GUIDE are not subjected to configuration check.
1.5.2 Notes on Ed.01
Ed.01 issued on February , 2004 is the first released and validated version of the handbook.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
17
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
2 PRODUCT-RELEASE HANDBOOKS
The list of handbooks given here below is valid on the issue date of this Handbook andcan be changed without any obligation for ALCATEL to update it in this Handbook.
Some of the handbooks listed here below may not be available on the issue date of thisHandbook.
The standard Customer Documentation in the English language for the equipment whoseproduct-release-version is stated in para.1.2 on page 13 consists of the following handbooks:
Table 2. Handbooks common to Alcatel Network Elements using 1320CT platform
N.B. 1320CT and Q3CT–P are equivalent terms
REF HANDBOOK ANV Part No.FACTORY
Part No.
THIS
HDBK
[1]
1320CT 3.xBasic Operator’s Handbook
3AL 79551 AAAA 957.140.042 N
[1]Provides general information and operational procedures common to all1320CT (Craft terminal) of Alcatel InfoModel Network Elements.
1330AS Rel.6.5Operator’s Handbook
3AL 88876 AAAA ––
[2]Provides detailed information and operational procedures regarding the alarmSurveillance software embedded in the 1320CT software package.Information about Historical Alarms and Network Element Symbols Management(Physical Network Management) are not valid for Craft Terminal. They are onlyused by Network Management.
ELB Rel.2.X Operator’s Handbook 3AL 88877 AAAA ––
[3]Provide detailed information and operational procedures regarding the EventLog Browsing software embedded in the 1320CT software package.
Table 3. Documentation on CD–ROM
See para. 4.5 on page 25
REF CD–ROM TITLE ANV Part No. FACTORY Part No.
[4]
1320CT Rel. 3.x CD–ROM–DOC EN 3AL 79552 AAAA 417.100.032
[4]Contains, in electronic format, the following handbooks: REF. [1] to [3]
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
18
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
Table 4. Handbooks related to the specific Network Element
HANDBOOK ANV Part No.FACTORYPart No.
THISHDBK
Technical Handbook NB NB
Provides information regarding Equipment description, Installation, Turn–On, Test andoperation, Maintenance, Hardware setting documentation
METRO OMSN CT Operator’s Handbook NB NB
Provides NE screens and operational procedures
N.B. The present Handbook is always supplied with Technical Handbook and CT Operator’sHandbook dedicated to the specific Network Element. Each manual has its own Part number.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
19
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
3 SAFETY NORMS AND LABELS
3.1 First aid for electric shock
Do not touch the patient with bare hands until the circuit has been opened.
Open the circuit by switching off the line switches. If that is not possible, protect yourself with drymaterial and free the patient from the conductor.
ARTIFICIAL RESPIRATION
It is important to start mouth to mouth resuscitation at once and seek doctor help immediately.
TREATMENT OF BURNS
This treatment should be used after the patient has regained consciousness. It can also be employed whilethe artificial respiration is being applied (in this case there should be at least two persons present).
WARNING:
• Do not attempt to remove his clothing from the burnt parts;
• Apply dry gauze on the burns;
• Do not apply ointments or other oily substances.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
20
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
Mouth to mouth resuscitation method
1
2
3
4
5
6
Lay the patient supine with his arms parallel with the body, if the patient is layingon an inclined plane, make sure that his stomach is slightly lower than his chest.Open the patient’s mouth and check that there are no extraneous bodies in hismouth (dentures, chewing–gum etc.),
Kneel beside the patient level with his head. Puta hand under the patient’s head and one underhis neck (see fig.) Lift the patient’s head and letit recline backwards as far as possible
Shift the hand from the patient’s neck to is chin:place your thumb between his chin and hismouth, the index along his jawbone, and keep theother fingers closed together (see fig.). Whileperforming these operations take a good supplyof oxygen by taking deep breaths with yourmouth open.
With your thumb between the patient’s chin andmouth keep his lips together and blow into hisnasal cavities (see fig.)
While performing these operations observe if thepatient’s chest rises (see fig.) If not it is possiblethat his nose is blocked: in that case open thepatient’s mouth as much as possible by pressingon his chin with your hand, place your lips aroundhis mouth and blow into his oral cavity. Observeif the patient’s chest heaves. This secondmethod can be used instead of the first evenwhen the patient’s nose is kept closed bypressing the nostrils together using the hand youwere holding his head with. The patient’s headmust be kept sloping backwards as much aspossible.
Start with ten rapid expirations, hence continue at a rate of twelve/fifteenexpirations per minute. Go on like this until the patient has regainedconsciousness, or until a doctor has ascertained his death.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
21
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
3.2 Norms and labels
Refer to the Technical Handbook associated to ALCATEL’s designed and manufactured equipmentto obtain the following information:
– COMPLIANCE WITH EUROPEAN NORMS.
– SAFETY RULES
• General rules
• Harmful optical signals
• Risk of explosion
• Moving mechanical parts
• Heat–radiating Mechanical Parts
– ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
– ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGERS (ESD)
– EQUIPMENT LABELS
Identical or similar information on Personal Computer, Work–Station etc., other than ALCATEL’s, loadedwith software applicative described in this Handbook, is supplied in the Constructor’s technicaldocumentation.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
22
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
23
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
4 GENERAL ON ALCATEL CUSTOMER DOCUMENTATION
4.1 Products, product-releases, versions and Customer Documentation
A ”product” is defined by the network hierarchical level where it can be inserted and by the whole ofperformance and services for which it is meant.A ”product” evolves through successive ”product-releases” which are the real products marketed fortheir delivery at a certain ”product-release” availability date.
So, a ”product–release” defines a set of hardware components and a software package which, as a whole,identify the possible network applications and the equipment performance which the specific”product-release” has been designed, engineered and marketed for.
In some cases a ”product-release” has further development steps, named ”versions”, that are born toimprove or add some performance (mainly software) with respect to the previous version, or for bug fixingpurposes.
A ”product-release” has its own standard Customer Documentation, composed by one or morehandbooks.
A new ”version” of a ”product-release” may or may not produce a change in the status of the CustomerDocumentation set, as described in para.4.4 on page 24.
4.2 Handbook supply to Customers
Handbooks are not automatically delivered together with the equipment they refer to.The number of handbooks per type to be supplied must be decided at contract level.
4.3 Aims of standard Customer Documentation
Standard Customer Documentation, referred to hereafter, must be always meant as plant-independent.Plant-dependent documentation, if envisaged by the contract, is subjected to commercial criteria as faras contents, formats and supply conditions are concerned (plant-dependent documentation is notdescribed here).
Standard hardware and software documentation is meant to give the Customer personnel the possibilityand the information necessary for installing, commissioning, operating and maintaining the equipmentaccording to Alcatel–Telecom Laboratory design choices.In particular the contents of the handbooks associated to the software applications focus on theexplanation of the man-machine interface and of the operating procedures allowed by it.
Consequently, no supply to the Customers of design documentation (like software source programs,programming tools, etc.) is envisaged.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
24
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
4.4 Handbook Updating
The handbooks associated to the ”product–release” are listed in para.2 on page 17.Each handbook is identified by:– the name of the ”product-release” (and ”version” when the handbook is applicable to the versions
starting from it, but not to the previous ones),– the handbook name,– the handbook P/N,– the handbook edition (usually first edition=01),– the handbook issue date. The date on the handbook does not refer to the date of print but to the date
on which the handbook source file has been completed and released for the production.
4.4.1 Changes introduced in the same product-release (same handbook P/N)
The edition and date of issue might change on future handbook versions for the following reasons:
– only the date changes (pointed out in the Table of Contents) when modifications are made to theeditorial system not changing the technical contents of the handbook.
– the edition, hence the date, is changed because modifications made concern technical contents. Inthis case:• the table in para.1.5 on page 16 indicates the section(s) edition change;• in each section, the main changes with respect to the previous edition are listed;• in affected chapters of each section, revision bars on the left of the page indicate modifications
in text and drawings (this is done after the first officially released and validated version).
Changes concerning the technical contents of the handbook cause the edition number increase (e.g. fromEd.01 to Ed.02). Slight changes (e.g. for corrections) maintain the same edition but with the addition ofa version character (e.g. from Ed.02 to Ed.02A).
NOTES FOR HANDBOOKS RELEVANT TO SOFTWARE APPLICATIONS
Handbooks relevant to software applications (typically the Operator’s Handbooks) are notmodified unless the new software ”version” distributed to Customers implies man–machineinterface changes or in case of slight modifications not affecting the understanding of theexplained procedures.Moreover, should the screen prints included in the handbook contain the product-release’s”version” marking, they are not replaced in the handbooks related to a subsequent version, ifthe screen contents are unchanged.
4.4.2 Supplying updated handbooks to Customers
Supplying updated handbooks to Customers who have already received previous issues is submitted tocommercial criteria.By updated handbook delivery it is meant the supply of a complete copy of the handbook new issue(supplying errata–corrige sheets is not envisaged).
4.4.3 Changes due to a new product-releaseA new product-release changes the handbook P/N and the edition starts from 01. In this case the modifiedparts of the handbook are not listed.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
25
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
4.5 Customer documentation supply on CD–ROM
In the following ’CD–ROM’ means ’Customer Documentation on CD–ROM’
4.5.1 Contents, creation and production of a CD–ROM
In most cases, a CD–ROM contains the documentation of one product–release(–version) and for a certainlanguage.In some other cases, the same CD–ROM can contain the documentation of differentproduct–release(–version)s for a certain language.
As a general rule:
– CD–ROMs for Network Management products do not contain:
• the Installation Guides
• the documentation of system optional features that Customers could not buy from Alcateltogether with the main applicative SW.
– CD–ROMs for Network Elements products do not contain the documentation of system optionalfeatures (e.g. System Installation Handbooks related to racks that Customers could not buy fromAlcatel together with the main equipment).
A CD–ROM is obtained collecting various handbooks and documents in .pdf format. Bookmarks andhyperlinks make the navigation easier. No additional information is added to each handbook, so that thedocumentation present in the CD–ROMs is exactly the same the Customer would receive on paper.
The files processed in this way are added to files/images for managing purpose and a master CD–ROMis recorded.
Suitable checks are made in order to have a virus–free product.
After a complete functional check, the CD–ROM image is electronically transferred to the archive of theProduction Department, so that the CD–ROM can be produced and delivered to Customers.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
26
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
4.5.2 Use of the CD–ROM
The CD–ROM can be used both in PC and Unix WS environments.
The CD–ROM starts automatically with autorun and hyperlinks from the opened “Index” document permitto visualize the .pdf handbooks.
Other hyperlinks permit to get, from the Technical handbooks, the specific .pdf setting documents.
In order to open the .pdf documents Adobe Acrobat Reader Version 4.0 (minimum) must have beeninstalled on the platform.
The CD–ROM doesn’t contain the Adobe Acrobat Reader program. The Customer is in charge of gettingand installing it.
ReadMe info is present on the CD–ROM to this purpose.
Then the Customer is allowed to read the handbooks on the PC/WS screen, using the navigation andzooming tools included in the tool, and to print selected parts of the documentation through a local printer.
4.5.3 CD–ROM identification
Each CD–ROM is identified:
1 ) by the following external identifiers, that are printed both on the booklet and the CD–ROM uppersurface:– the name of the ”product–release(s)” (and ”version” when the CD–ROM is applicable to
the versions starting from it, but not to the previous ones),– a writing indicating the language(s),– the CD–ROM P/N (Factory P/N 417.xxx.xxx x and ANV P/N),– the CD–ROM edition (usually first edition=01)
2 ) and, internally, by the list of the source handbooks and documents (P/Ns and editions) by whosecollection and processing the CD–ROM itself has been created.
4.5.4 CD–ROM updating
The list of source handbook/document P/Ns–editions indicated in previous para. 4.5.3 point 2 ) , inassociation with the CD–ROM own P/N–edition, is also loaded in the Alcatel–Information–System as astructured list.Whenever a new edition of any of such handbooks/documents is released in the Alcatel archive system,a check in the Alcatel–Information–System is made to identify the list of CD–ROMs that must be updatedto include the new editions of these handbooks/documents.This causes the planning and creation of a new edition of the CD–ROM.Updating of CD–ROMs always follows, with a certain delay, the updating of the single handbookscomposing the collection.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
27
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
5 ACRONYMS AND GLOSSARY OF TERMS
5.1 Acronyms
ALMAP: Alcatel Management Platform
AS: Alarm Surveillance
ASAP: Alarm Severity Assignment Profile
CD–ROM: Compact Disc Read Only Memory
CCITT: Telegraph and Telephone International Consultative Committee
CT: Craft Terminal
DCCM: Data Communication Channels Multiplex
DCCR: Data Communication Channels Regeneration
DCN: Data Communications Network
ECC: Embedded Communication Channels
EML: Element Management Layer
EPS: Equipment Protection Switching
FAD: Functional Access Domain
Gbit/s: Gigabits per second
GNE: Gateway Network Element
GOSIP: Government Open System Interconnection Profile
HMI: Human Machine Interface
IEEE: Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
IM: Information Manager
ISO: International Standard Organization
ITU–T: International Telecommunication Union – Telecommunication sector
JRE: Java Runtime Environment
Kbit/s: Kilobits per second
LAN: Local Area Network
LVC: Lower Order Virtual Container
MAC: Media Access Control
Mbit/s: Megabits per seconds
MIB: Management Information Base
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
28
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
MS: Multiplex Section
MSN: MultiService Node
NAD: Network Access Domain
NAP: Network Access Point
NE: Network Element
NES: Network Element Synthesis
NML: Network Management Layer
NSAP: Network Service Access Point
OS: Operation System
OSI: Open System Interconnection
OSPF: Open Short Path First
PC: Personal Computer
PDH: Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy
PI: Physical Interface
RAM: Random Access Memory
RAS: Remote Access Service
SCSI: Small Computer Serial Interface
SDH: Synchronous Digital Hierarchy
SEC: SECurity
TMN: Telecommunications Management Network
TN: Telecommunications Network
TP: Termination Point
TCP/IP: Transmission Control Protocol / Internet Protocol
USM: User Service Manager
XC: Cross–Connection
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
29
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
5.2 Glossary of terms
Acknowledgment:When an alarm is taken into account by the application, the operator has to acknowledge it to point outthat he has seen it and that he will react in the right way. During alarm configuration it is possible to seta maximum delay for alarm acknowledgement. The operator can decide whether or not alarm clearing hasto be acknowledged.
Administrator:A user who has access rights to all the Management Domains of the Craft Terminal product. He has accessto the whole network and to all the management functionalities.
Alarm:An alerting indication to a condition that may have an immediate or potentially negative impact on the stateof an equipment or the Craft Terminal. An alarm is characterized by an alarm begin and an alarm end.
Alarm Severity Assignment Profile:Function allowing the assignment of severities to the alarms depending on their probable causes.
Alarm Status:Identifies the type and severity of an occurring alarm.
Board:A board is part of a NE. They are electronic cards that fit into slots in the NE.
Compact Disk Read Only Memory:Data saving support from which the information can only be read. Is useful for stocking data due to itsavailable memory space.
Craft Terminal:Workstation or Personal computer (PC) from which local address to a NE is possible. It can be used toconfigure or perform monitoring tasks on the NE.
Cross–connectionCross–Connections provide the network with the Routing Capabilities, this is the possibility of routing onesignal to a particular destination.
Digital Communication network:Communication Network in which the transmission of data is done in a digitized format.
Embedded Communication Channel:Communication channel used in conjunction with packet commuting networks (X25) to manage distantSDH networks. These communication channels are related to the QECC protocols.
Element Management Layer:This application is responsible for the configuration and management of Network Elements.
Equipment Protection Switching:Used to provide protection for cards within an equipment to protect traffic in the event of card failure.
Filter:They are related to the alarms or events generated on a NE or internally within the Craft Terminal itself.They can be configured by an operator to reject specified types of notifications and limit the processingthat is applied to them.
Flushing:This deals with logs. When a log is flushed, all its records are deleted.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
30
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
Functional Access Domain:It defines the range of functions which are available to a specified user.
Gigabits per second:Unit that corresponds to the transmission of 109 bits every second.
Gateway Network Element:It is a Network Element devoted to the control, from the OS, of those NEs providing a QECC interface. Todo this it uses a QB3 interface and performs the QB3 ↔ QECC conversion.
Human Machine Interface:It is the graphical user interface application through which the operators interact with the system.
History Report:This function enables operators to get information concerning performances, security or alarms on entitiescomposing the network, or on the network itself. The operator specifies the time period for which herequires the report.
Information Manager:Processes used by the Craft Terminal that are the functional part of the Craft Terminal applications.
International Telegraph and Telephone Consultative Committee:Standard organization for telecommunications. Now called the ITU–T (International TelecommunicationUnion).
Kilobits per second:Unit corresponding to the transmission of 103 bits every second.
Line Terminal:A line terminal is the end point of a communication link. It is used to transmit or receive signals. They canundertake signal conversion functions (adapting a signal to two different transmission media) ormultiplexing/demultiplexing functions.
Logs:Logs are files used to store history data concerning the incoming notifications, operator commands andsystem alarms. The size of the log can be configured.
Management Domain:The Craft terminal product is partitioned into management domains for functional purposes. Eachmanagement domain is associated with functionalities that enable the operators to manage the NEs.
Media Access Control Address:Represents the Level 2 address for Local Area Networks.
Megabits per second:Unit that corresponds to the transmission of 106 bits every second.
Management Information Base:Describes all the managed objects controlled by the system.
Multiplexer:Equipment used to combine several signals to produce a single signal at a higher transmission rate andto decompose it back to the smaller rate signals.
Multiplex Section:In general, represents the section containing the multiplexed signals.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
31
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
MultiService Node:Equipment that can be configured as a Multiple Line Terminal Multiplexer or as an Add/Drop Multiplexeror as a Mini local cross–connect.
Network Access Domain:Defined as a set of Network Elements. NADs are used to define the set of Network Elements that a usercan manage.
Network Element:Either a telecommunication equipment or groups parts of a Telecommunication Network. Havecharacteristics compliant with ITU recommendations.
Network Element Synthesis:Common Craft Terminal view, displayed to the operator after the Craft Terminal start–up. It manages thesupervision and login of the NE, accessing the User Service Manager functions.
Network Management Level:Designates the management functions performed on networks elements assembled in a network.
Notification:Spontaneous data received by the system concerning a NE.
Operation System:A system dedicated to the supervision of NEs in a standard way, using protocols and interfaces. It offers tothe operator a set of functions necessary to supervise the NEs. The 1353SH is an Operation System.
Operator:The end–user of the Craft Terminal. He supervises NE or part of the network that is dependant on his userprofile.
Physical Interface:Electrical or Electrical/Optical transformers that decouple the line signals and adapt the form of signal forfurther transmission. This functional block also manages clock extraction, signal loss monitoring andloopback functions.
Port:A physical point at which the Network Element can be attached to a transmission medium. A port is eithera termination point or a source point.
Repeater:Equipment used to regenerate a signal when it has travelled a long distance.
Severity:Linked to alarms, severities indicate the magnitude related to the failure.
Small Computer Serial Interface:The Small Computer System Interface is an American National Standard for interconnecting computersand peripheral devices. The SCSI standard includes specifications for a variety of device types.
Session:A session is a temporary association between an operator and the Craft Terminal. A session always beginswith the identification and authentication of the operator (the login phase) and ends with the exit of theoperator from the Craft Terminal (the logout phase).
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
32
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
Telecommunication Management Network:Defines the concept of interoperable management of TNs. They provide an organized network structureto achieve the interconnection of the different components of the TN and the services to process theinformation.
Telecommunication Network:Describes the network to be managed. Provides the transmission, the transport and the switchingsupports to the interconnected Network Elements.
Terminal Point:Describes either the origin or the termination of a signal in an equipment. Is related to a port.
Thresholding:This is the assignment of a specified value to monitored parameters (for example Bit Error Rates) that,when exceeded, generate trouble indications.
User Profile:Identifies the functionalities of the Craft Terminal to which a user has access. A finite number of predefineduser profiles is determined by a fixed set of FADs. To give user access to Craft Terminal functionality, theadministrator must assign a profile to a sole user account by choosing one among the predefined profilesinstalled with the Craft Terminal.
User Service Manager:These are presentation processes used by the Craft Terminal to manage the Human Machine Interfaceand facilitate the interaction with the product, to configure, check and monitor the NEs.
Wrapping:Wrapping is the technique that enables the most recent entries in a file to replace the oldest when a fileis full.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
33
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
INTRODUCTION
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
34
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
35
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF THE CRAFT TERMINAL
1.1 Introduction
With the extensive introduction of SDH and WDM in the transport network, centralized and integratednetwork management is mandatory for Network Operators to realize the potential cost saving and requiredQuality of service.
Alcatel provides a comprehensive range of Network Management Applications compliant with the ITU–TTelecommunication management Network Principles.
The Craft Terminal is a project in charge of the local management of single network elements from differentAlcatel SDH and WDM products, providing ITU– compliant Information Model Interface to the NetworkElement.Multiple NE management up to 32 Network elements is possible, obtaining a remote Craft Terminalapplication. This number is defined in order not to overload the network.The 1320 Craft Terminal manages all Q3 Network Elements in the Alcatel Transmission catalogue, exceptfor the Cross Connect (DXC).Further Q3* NEs can be managed using the same PC, being the NECTAS applicative contained in thesoftware to install in the PC. Management of Q3* NE is described in the Operator’s Handbook dedicatedto the specific NE.
By installing additional software, from 1320CT Craft Terminal it is possible to run Specific Craft Terminalapplications that allows the management of th ISA (Integrated Service Adapter) boards equipped in theNE. An example of ISA boards are ATM boards.The software related to ATM Management provide a human interface permitting the Operator to managethe relevant functions (for details refer to the relevant ATM CT Operator’s Handbook).
1320CT can be integrated to products in charge of the management of networks and network elementsfrom different Alcatel product lines like the Element Management Level (EML) and higher managementlevels like the Network Management Level (NML) or the Service Management Level (SML).
The Craft Terminal uses a state–of–the–art platform for providing an advanced and integrated Management. It is ALMAP, the Alcatel Management Platform.
The Craft Terminal is based on EML core, a project that extends ALMAP in order to provide a commonset of functions for projects which realize an Alcatel network management system. This project is commonwith the 1353SH (Element Management Level ), permitting the same approach for the NE management(commonality of views and commands).
Examples of network management architecture are reported in Figure 1. on page 37. and Figure 2. onpage 38.In this figure any generic SDH or WDM equipment (Add / Drop Multiplexer, Cross–connect, Regenerator,etc.) inserted in the network is indicated by the acronym NE (network element).
As explained in the Technical Handbook and as stated in ITU–T Rec. G.784, the SDH/WDM Equipmentprovides two types of physical interfaces for management functions: the F interface and the QB3 interface.To these interfaces can be connected the manager computer, that can be:
• a CRAFT TERMINAL (CT). It is generally a personal computer (PC), connected through the Finterface for local management.
• OPERATION SYSTEM (OS). Workstations utilized for the TMN (TelecommunicationsManagement Network). They are connected through the QB3 interface, for networkmanagement.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
36
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
This Operator’s Handbook deals with the management achieved by means of the first type ofcomputer, i.e. the CRAFT TERMINAL. For the Telecommunications Management Network descriptionrefer to the handbooks of the various Operation Systems.
The management can be realized in local or remote mode:
• in the local mode the managed equipment are directly connected to the computer via Finterface
• in the remote mode the managed equipment are indirectly connected via the OSI Networkingwhich can include both DCCM / DCCR protocol or Ethernet LAN (Local Area Network)
• in the remote mode the managed equipment are indirectly connected via na IP network usinga tunnel over IP.
The software provided needs a WINDOWS NT / WINDOWS 2000 or WINDOWS XP computer operatingenvironment.The operator interface is organized in a WINDOWS system. A skill on these tools is required on behalfof the user.For the computer characteristics see chapter 1.2 on page 40.
The software products are distributed by Alcatel in a CD–ROM.
In this CD–ROM are contained:
• Software products for management by means of the craft terminal
• Software product for updating the NE (download)
The software products used for management permits the dialogue between the Craft terminal and theNE, to realize the functions of the applications as configuration, alarm management, etc.
The software product used for updating the NE must be installed on the PC and then downloaded on theNE, thus following product evolution.
The list with the part numbers of the software products is inserted in the Operator’s Handbook dedicatedto a single NE.
Figure 3. on page 39 illustrates the usage of all the software products presented in these paragraphs.
The management main functions permit the following:
– Alarm (fault) management, for real time alarm reporting and subsequent fault localization andcorrection
– System management, example:• Configuration management, for handling operational data of the Network Element• Performance Monitoring management, to set up, collect, log and display performance data
associated with the managed NE according to ITU–T G.826.– NE access according to the user profile– Map handling, for construction of network topology, supervision and login of NE and software
management functions– optionally (by adding specific software) Specific Craft Terminal application for ISA boards
management can be run starting from 1320T NES (Network Element Synthesis) window.
The management functions are operative for all the NEs, local or remote.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
37
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
OPERATIONSSYSTEM
N.EGATEWAY
CRAFT TERMINAL
OPERATIONSSYSTEM
N.EGATEWAY
LANBRIDGES /
N.E
NEGATEWAY
DCNLAN
LAN
QB3
F F F
DCC/LAN
NE NEF
N.E
DCC/LAN DCC/LAN
NE
DCC/LAN DCC/LAN
F
DCC/LAN
N.EF
NEF
N.EF
DCC/LAN
DCN : Data Communication Network
N.E. : Network Element (MSN, ADM, CROSS CONNECT; etc)
GATEWAY
LAN
QB3
CRAFT TERMINAL
OPERATOR’S HANDBOOK
ROUTERS
LANBRIDGES /
ROUTERS
Figure 1. Example of network management architecture
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
38
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
SDH (OSI) & ATM (SNMP)
TMN
SDH+ATM
NE
SDH NE
Gateway NE
OS
SDH+ATM
NE
SDH NE
SDH+ATM
NE
F
CT
FCT
QB3
QECC
QECC
QECC
QECC
QECC
QECC
F
F
F
LAPD
OSI
SNMP
802.3
LAPD
OSILAPD
OSISNMP
LAPD
OSI
SNMP
LAPDOSILAPD
(GNE)
SDH–CT
ATM–CT&
SDH–CT
SDH–OS
ATM–OS&
OSPF AREA1
IP Network
CT
Interface
Interface
Network Card
Figure 2. Example of management of an SDH network with SDH and ATM traffic
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
39
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
to install in the PC
Software Product for download
Software product for management and
THIS EQUIPMENT IS ONLY AN EXAMPLE
CD ROM
Software Product for downloadto update the NE
Software product for management
Figure 3. Software products installation
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
40
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
1.2 Craft Terminal characteristics
1.2.1 Craft Terminal Interface
The Craft terminal permits to transfer information between the Operator and the Network Element (NE).For this purpose it uses the following interfaces:
– Operator (human interface) : Windows Microsoft system with windows, scrolling–down menu andmouse functions.The operator can traverse the tree–structured environment selectingthe applications and functions allowed
– NE (equipment interface): the NE is linked to the PC through the RS232C port (F interface).
1.2.2 Computer hardware configuration
The computer configuration to be used as a Craft Terminal support consists of:
– basic requirement:
• CPU Pentium II 200 Mhz
• RAM 128 Mb (256 Mb suggested)
• HARD DISK free space 4 Gb
• Swap area ≥ 300 Mb
• MONITOR 12” (14” suggested)
• RESOLUTION 1024 x 768 pixel
• CD–Rom driveFor Craft Terminal Software Installation and Handbook looking through the CD–ROM
– options:
• Ethernet portAs an alternative to the CD–Rom drive for Craft Terminal Software Installation.In alternative to the serial bootstrap, the Ethernet port can be used for LAN based bootstrap.In this case it permits to download the NE without software inside, reducing time to someminutes.
• one 3” 1/2 floppy disk drive (1 , 44MB)To facilitate external files exchanges and to support the installation of equipment other thaninfo–model Alcatel, generally managed by the 1320 NX Craft Terminal (NECTAS application).
• a printer (serial or parallel known by WINDOWS)
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
41
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
1.2.3 Computer software configuration
The following software items are required:
• WINDOWS NT v. 4.0 Services Package 3 (Copyright Microsoft Corporation) already installedor WINDOWS 2000 / WINDOWS XP
• Sun Microsystems Java JRE 1.2 or 1.3. This software is contained in the “Alcatel Softwareproduct” (CD–ROM) implementing the Craft Terminal management functions.
• Netscape Communicator 4.x (or higher version) or Internet Explorer 4.x (or higher version)
• Alcatel Software product (CD–ROM) implementing the Craft Terminal management functionsand containing also the NE software, listed in the Operator’s Handbook dedicated to the specificNE.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
42
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
1.3 Craft Terminal main functionalities
In this chapter are described the main functionalities of the Craft Terminal. The functionalities constitutethe heading of each sub–section below.
1.3.1 System management
– Start–Up/Stop of the system.– Visualization of all the Craft Terminal related processes.– The computing environment (system back–up/restore).
1.3.2 Security management
This is related to security within the Craft Terminal.The functions of configuration and installation are accessible only to the Administrator.It deals with:
– Access to the system (password modification, login, logout).– Profile assignment (determines which functionalities the user has access to).– Property of the map (public / private)
1.3.3 Construction (network topology) management
This deals with the topology of the Network as seen from the user interface. The main operations that canbe undertaken are:
– Entities construction (map, submap, Network Element, SNMP Network Element)– Entities management (delete, save, submaps, Ne, change NE address)– ISA board population
1.3.4 Network element management
It deals with the management of the equipment present in the network.Network Element management is detailed in the Operator’s Handbook dedicated to the NE
Some of the functionalities offered by the Craft Terminal are common to all the NEs, other functionalitiesare dedicated and present only for some NE types.
– Supervision of NEs.– Changing of boards and subracks.– Configuration of protection schemes.– Allow/inhibit alarm notifications.– Configuration of the alarm severity profile.– Time management.– Cross Connection management.– Port management.– External point management.– Performance monitoring. It consists of a set of functions that evaluate and report on the behavior of
the NEs and their effectiveness relating to the communications taking place on the Network.– Synchronization– Software download for NE upgrading, following the network evolution.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
43
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
1.3.5 Software management
The software refers to the software package(s) present in the NE. This is the support of the availableapplications running on any NE. The operations concerned are:
– Getting information about the software package(s) downloaded in a selected NE.– Getting information about the software package(s) present on the Craft Terminal for the NE.– Downloading software packages from the Craft Terminal to a NE.– Activating/Deactivating softwares packages.– Importing/exporting configuration files.
1.3.6 Alarm management
This function is used to detect and correct abnormal functioning of the system. The managed entitiestransmit alarms to the Craft Terminal which processes them.
Alarm information is detailed in the Alarms Surveillance Manual.
The different alarm functionalities are:
– Reception and processing of alarms.– Establishment of filter criteria on alarm reception.– Log management of alarms.– Internal storing and treatment of alarm information.– User interface service management for displaying purposes.– User interface operations for alarm processing.– External point alarm probable cause modification– The alarms concerning a particular managed entity will be represented in a synthetic way in all the
views concerning the entity. This aspect is developed in the Operator’s Manual dedicated to thespecific Network Element.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
44
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
45
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
2 CRAFT TERMINAL GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACE PRINCIPLES
2.1 Generalities
The Craft Terminal user interface is based on Windows NT. This section will introduce the differentelements composing the interface as well as the users general environment.Details on the various elements will be obtained using the Help of Windows NT and the relevant manual.
The users work environment can be partitioned into the following utilities:
– Keyboards: the different keys and the actions they induce will be defined.– Mouse: the functioning of the mouse buttons will be introduced.– Desktop: a desktop is the screen area where you bring the applications needed for your work,
arrange them to suit your preferences, and put them away when you’re done. Desktop provide a wayto make a single display seem like several displays. You can customize the desktop by addingshortcuts to your favorite programs, document, etc and by changing its look as you like.
– Icon: A small, graphic representation of an object on the workspace. Objects can be ”iconified”(turned into icons) to clear a cluttered workspace and ”normalized” (returned to their originalappearance) as needed. Processes executing in an object continue to execute when the object isiconified.
– Windows: the window’s general layout, menu and configuration (size) will be described.– Buttons: the different types of buttons to confirm, cancel, select options are described.– Menus: the menu types used to open windows, select icons and navigate through the different
functionalities of the Craft Terminal are introduced.– Entry and Dialogue Boxes: the different types of boxes and their aspect is defined so that the user
will be familiar with them.
The above utilities are detailed in the following sub–chapters.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
46
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
2.2 Keyboard
2.2.1 The different keys
A workstation keyboard has the following types of keys:
– Alphabetic Keys:They represent the letters of the alphabet, the punctuation marks and text–formatting functions suchas Tab, Return and the Space bar.
– Numeric Keys:They represent the numbers from 0 to 9. They are located near the top of the keyboard and in anumeric keypad on the right side of the keyboard.
– Navigation Keys:Used to move the insertion cursor (up, down, right, left). These keys are commonly called arrow keysand are represented on the keyboard by the symbols, �, �, �,�. This category comprises also thekeys like Home, Page Up, Page Down and End.
– Modifier Keys:Used in conjunction with other keys to modify the meaning of these keys. They are Ctrl, Shift or Alt keys.
– Special purpose Keys:They have particular functions and are labelled to specify their function. They are, for example, theHelp, Esc, Enter, Delete, BackSpace and Insert keys.
– Function Keys:They provide extra or general functions. They are labelled F1, F2, F3..etc... and are located acrossthe top of the keyboard. They can be used as accelerator keys, giving the possibility to select menuoptions rapidly using the keyboard. For example, under certain conditions, the F1 key generates aHELP dialogue box.
2.2.2 Location and insertion cursor
This cursor takes the form of an I–beam pointer. It indicates where the text is going to be entered. Thiscursor is frequently met when using Entry boxes (see next paragraphs). The cursor can be movedhorizontally and vertically using the Navigation keys.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
47
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
2.3 Mouse
The mouse is associated with a mouse pointer. This pointer represents the current position of the mouseon the screen. Any movement of the mouse, on the mouse pad, moves the pointer on the screen in anidentical way. The mouse can be moved anywhere on the workspace.
2.3.1 Mouse buttons
There are 2 Mouse buttons. The actions undertaken using the different mouse buttons depend on theirconfiguration.
Details on mouse configuration can be obtained in the “Mouse property” of “Control panel”.
– Select / Deselect button: enables you to select/deselect objects.– Custom button: enables you to generate pop–up menus.
In a right handed mouse configuration the “Select / deselect” button is left side.
With left handed mouse configuration it is on the opposite side.
2.3.2 Mouse functionalities
– Selecting an object: first move the mouse pointer to the object. Then select the object by clickingon it with the ”Select” mouse button. The object appearance changes indicating that it has beenselected.
– Deselecting an object: first press and hold down the “Ctrl” key, move the mouse pointer to theselected object and click using the ”Select / Deselect” mouse buttons. The de–selection of an objectmakes it revert to its original appearance.
– Drag–and–drop mouse functionality: used for displacing objects or icons on the workspace. Touse it, first move the mouse pointer to the object you wish to move. Then press, and hold down, the”Select” mouse button and drag the object to the chosen area using the mouse. When the object hasreached the chosen area, release the mouse button.
– Double clicking: numerous actions can be undertaken by double clicking using the “select” mousebutton. For example, closing windows, opening windows related to objects.
• Place the mouse pointer over the object you wish to open.• Click twice, rapidly, using the ”Select” mouse button on the object.• The mouse pointer can take the work in progress representation until the object should open.
• Place the mouse pointer over the ”Window menu button” of the window (see para. 2.4.on page48)
• Click twice, rapidly, using the ”Select” mouse button.• The action should be immediate and the window is closed.
2.3.3 Mouse pointer signification
The shape of the mouse pointer gives an indication of the actions that can be undertaken in that particularmouse position. The user will soon understand the different functionalities related to the mouse pointerform. To help him, a list of the mouse pointer forms is given in the “Mouse property” of “Control panel”.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
48
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
2.4 Windows
This section defines the attributes of windows and describes their general aspects.
2.4.1 Dimensions and layout
The figure below indicates the standard window layout.
Window titleMaximize button
Iconify button
Window menu button Close button
Menu Bar
Client area
Scroll bars
Resize borders
Figure 4. Example of a window layout.
2.4.2 Client area and Window titles
The Client area is the area in which you work. You can write text, insert or construct images or, as in theEML–USM, display Network or Equipment views. The window title gives the name of the window.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
49
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
2.4.3 Window menu
It enables operations to be undertaken on the window.
To open the window menu, click on the window menu button using the ”Select” mouse button. You canthen select an item from the pull down menu that appears. The window menu options are shown in thefigure below.
Window menu button
Figure 5. Window menu options.
– Restore: restores the window from the iconified state to its normal size (in this case the window isalready opened so this menu option is greyed. Greyed menu options are explained in paragraph 2.6on page 54).
– Move: displaces the window around the workspace,– Size: changes the size of the window,– Minimize: iconifies the window,– Maximize: gives the window the full screen size,– Close: the window is closed and disappears from the workspace.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
50
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
2.4.4 Scroll bars
If the window size does not enable all the information contained in the client area to be visible, scroll barsenable you to move up, down, right or left in the client area.
There are vertical and horizontal scroll bars as shown in the figure below.
Stepper arrows
Sliders
ScrollRegion
Scroll Region
Figure 6. Scroll bar components.
There are four ways to use scroll bars:
– Using the stepper arrows.Place the mouse pointer on the stepper arrow and click on it using the ”Select” mouse button. Thecontents in the client area are displaced only one unit in the direction indicated by the stepper arrow.
– Using the scroll regions.Place the mouse pointer in the scroll region outside the sliders. Click, using the ”Select” mousebutton. The contents in the client area are displaced one window length.
– Using the sliders.Place the mouse pointer on the slider. Drag, using the ”Select” mouse button, the slider in thedirection desired. The contents in the client area are displaced as long as the slider moves.
– Using the ”deselect” button in scroll regions.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
51
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
2.5 Buttons
In any working application related to the Craft Terminal, the operator will have to confirm, cancel, selectoptions or ask for help using buttons. Different types of buttons exist and are described in this section.
2.5.1 Push buttons
Push buttons are identified by two characteristics:
– The graphical image representing the button. The buttons are generally rectangular or square.– The label identifying the action associated with the button. The label is placed on the button.
Examples of the different types of push buttons are described in the figure below.
: Gives access to help on context.
: Confirms an operation or action.
: Cancels an operation or action.
: Closes a Dialogue Box or a window.
: Confirms an operation or action.
Figure 7. Examples of push buttons.
To apply the action related to a push button, position the mouse pointer over the button you wish to selectand click using the ”Select” mouse button.
Push buttons may open dialogue boxes. The reader may note that often, identical push buttons are foundon different windows or dialogue boxes. This is because they often require similar actions to beundertaken. In particular the OK, Help, Cancel or Close buttons appear frequently.
The Help push button generates a HELP dialogue box enabling you to get information on the context ofthe dialogue box from which the help was requested.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
52
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
2.5.2 Check buttons
Check buttons are identified by two characteristics:
– The graphical image representing the button. The buttons are square shaped.– The label identifying the option associated with the button. The label is placed next to the button.
Check buttons are used to select several options simultaneously. They can be checked in anycombination, including all check buttons at the same time.In the following figure, the event type Communication, Equipment and Environmental has been selectedfrom among the other event types.
Selected item
Unselected items
Figure 8. Examples of check buttons.
2.5.3 Radio buttons
Radio buttons are identified by two characteristics:
– The graphical image representing the button. The buttons are circle shaped.– The label identifying the action associated with the button. The label is placed next to the button.
Radio buttons usually display state information associated with a small number of mutually exclusivestates. They often occur in pairs, such as yes/no or on/off options. Examples of radio buttons are givenbelow.
Selected radio button
Figure 9. Examples of radio buttons.
Each radio button represents a single choice selection. Selecting one radio button automatically deselectsthe others in the set.To select a radio button, place the mouse pointer over the button needed and click on it using the ”Select”mouse button.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
53
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
2.5.4 Option buttons
When you click on an option button, you open an option menu from which you choose a single item. Optionbuttons are used when a list of items are mutually exclusive.
Option button
Figure 10. Example of Option Button.
N.B. The example given above enables you to choose the TP type. To open the option menu, clickon the option button with the ”Select” mouse button. Select an item from the list that opens.
Option button
Option menu
Figure 11. Example of Option Button.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
54
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
2.6 Menus
In this section is described an important aspect of the user interface. The user constantly has to openwindows, select icons and navigate through the different functionalities of the Craft Terminal. To do thishe will use menus.
A menu consists of a title, that usually identifies the nature of the actions that can be undertaken, and alist of options associated with actions.
There are different menu types that can be classified as follows:
– menu bars,– pull down menus,– cascading menus,– tear_off menus,– pop–up menus.
These types of menus are detailed below. The details concern a view of the menu types on real windows.
2.6.1 Menu bars
They are present at the top of a window, under the title of the window. They appear automatically alongwith the window. An example is given in the figure below. They contain the titles from which pull downmenus and cascading menus are opened.
Window title
Menu Bar
Figure 12. Window view showing the menu bar.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
55
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
2.6.2 Pull down menus
A pull down menu is pulled down from a menu item present in a menu bar. To open a pull down menu, clickon the title of the menu you need to open with the ”Select” mouse button.
Pull down menu selected.
Menu items
Figure 13. Window view with Pull down menu.
N.B. A menu option followed by ”...” means that selecting this option opens another view.For example the Open... or Save As... menu options in the File pull down menu.
N.B. A menu option followed by a sequence of keys signifies accelerators.Accelerators are used as shortcuts to access functions. For example, pressing the ALT key andthe F4 key simultaneously closes the window (see Figure 5. on page 49).
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
56
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
2.6.3 Cascading menus
Cascading menus are derived from pull down menus and represent additional options for the pull downmenu item selected. Cascading menus are indicated if the ”>” sign follows an option in a pull down menu.
To open a cascading menu, click on the menu option with the ”>” sign in the pull down menu.
Figure 14. Window view with Cascading menu.
In the figure above, the Alarms > menu option is selected.
2.6.4 Pop–up menus
Pop–up menus appear when you click, using the ”Custom” mouse button, in the following cases:
– Clicking on a symbol in a view.In this case, after selecting the symbol, click on it using the ”Custom” mouse button. The pop–upmenu opens. The menu stays open. Select an item from the menu by clicking on it using the ”Select”or ”Custom” mouse buttons.
– Clicking on the window menu button.In this case, place the mouse pointer over the window menu button and keep the ”Custom” buttonpressed. Drag the mouse pointer to the menu option you require. The menu option is highlighted.Release the mouse button when the correct menu option choice is done.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
57
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
2.6.5 Unavailable menu items and Menu item Selection
In an opened menu (pull down or cascading), any greyed option cannot be activated. All the items thatare not greyed can be accessed. An example is given below:
Greyed menu optionnot selectable
Figure 15. Unselectable menu items.
To select an item from a menu (any type of menu) place the mouse pointer over the item and click usingthe ”Select” mouse button. The item will appear highlighted.
Selected menuitem ”highlighted”
Figure 16. Highlighted menu item indicating selection.
2.6.6 Mnemonics
A mnemonic is a single letter that is underlined in a menu (in Menu bars, Pull down menus or Cascadingmenus). For example, in Figure 16. every item of the menu bar has a single letter underlined. It enablesto select the corresponding menu item.
– To open a pull down menu press, simultaneously, the ALT key and the mnemonic of the pull downmenu you wish to open. The pull down menu opens immediately.
– To select an option from the opened pull down menu, press the character corresponding to themnemonic of the option on the keyboard.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
58
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
2.6.7 Graphical User Interface (GUI) Key accelerators
The key combination <Ctrl> + <Key> is an additional method to call a dialog in the USM view; this keycombinations are known as “accelerators” (see Figure 17. on page 58 as example) .
Figure 17. Example of Keys accelerator in the Transmission view
Example of accelerators and associated action in the Transmission view of the USM are:
Ctrl + A show AddTp Dialog Box
Ctrl + N expand Next Level Down
Ctrl + L expand whoLeDown
Ctrl + U expand next Level Up
Ctrl + H Hide Lower Tp
Ctrl + X show CC Management Dialog Box
Ctrl + D show CC MoDify Dialog Box
Ctrl + W show CC Tp Dialog Box
Ctrl + M show PMon Management Dialog Box
Ctrl + K show LoopbacK Management Dialog Box
Ctrl + B navigate to SupportedBoard view
Ctrl + P navigate to Port view
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
59
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
Examples of accelerators and associated action in the Port view:
Ctrl + X show CC Management Dialog Box
Ctrl + D show CC MoDify Dialog Box
Ctrl + W show CC Tp Dialog Box
Ctrl + M show PMon Management Dialog Box
Ctrl + K show LoopbacK Management Dialog Box
Ctrl + B navigate to Supported Board view
Ctrl + T navigate to Transmission view
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
60
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
2.7 Entry boxes
2.7.1 Description and Definition
Entry boxes are windows in which you can consult, add or modify information or data. Figure 18. givesyou examples of the general representation of an Entry Box.
Label of the Entry box Title of the window
Entry box(text entryarea)
Figure 18. Example of a dialogue box having Entry Boxes.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
61
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
Each Entry Box has two parts:
– Entry Box Label: Indicates what is entered or what is to be entered in the entry area concerned.Entry Box: When selected, enables you to enter a text.
N.B. The text entry areas may not be accessible for entering text. In this case they have a differentcolor than other entry areas in which text can be entered. In the example above, the Granularityentry box may not be used for text entry. Its color is lighter than the other entry areas.Furthermore the text cursor is dotted, indicating that text cannot be entered.
To access an entry box and enter text, click on the text entry area. The text cursor begins to blink. The textcursor has an I–beam shape. The following keys are useful when entering text.
Key Function
Back Space Deletes to the left.
Del Deletes to the right.
�, �, �, � Displace the cursor along the text.
To access another entry box, you can either click in the entry box using the ”Select” mouse button or usethe Tab key on the keyboard.
Selecting the Tab key, on the keyboard, enables you to pass to an entry box situated beneath the one fromwhich the Tab key is pressed. Selecting the Shift+Tab keys gives you access to an entry box situatedabove the one from which the action is launched.
N.B. The Tab key does not give you access to those entry boxes that are read only and in which youcannot write. Therefore, when a dialogue box containing entry boxes opens, the Tab key takesyou directly to the first entry box in which you can write.
2.7.2 Syntactic guidelines
This concerns the use of upper case and lower case characters when entering text.The Craft Terminal software distinguishes between the two so care must be taken when entering text. Thetext entered is re–displayed in its original form.This means that if upper case characters are given to a Log file name, the name will appear in upper casecharacters in the save directory.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
62
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
2.8 Dialogue boxes
2.8.1 Generalities
Dialogue boxes provide an interface between the Craft Terminal and the user. They enable to confirmoperations or consult information, displayed by the system, following an action of the user.There are many types of dialogue boxes. They generally combine several of the graphical controlspreviously described (scroll bars, push buttons...). The principal dialogue boxes are described below.
2.8.2 List dialogue boxes
A list dialogue box is generally a window that enables the operator to consult and select items from anexisting list. They have a Title heading indicating the purpose or contents of the List box. Depending onthe size of the List box, scroll bars are present or not.Different types of List boxes can be distinguished.
a ) Single column lists.
As the name suggests, they enable the operator to select elements from a single list. An exampleis shown below.
Item List ofselectedfrom list.
Push buttons
Optionbuttons
existing
Push buttons:actions on List
TPs
Figure 19. Single List box.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
63
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
As seen in the figure above, List boxes contain:
• A Title: specifying the context of the List box.• A List: from which an item or items are selected.• Options: used to undertake actions on the items in the list. For example, ”Search TPs”.• Option button: in which the operator can select an item.• Push buttons: to undertake actions on the elements in the list, to get help (Help push button),
to close the list box (Close push button), to confirm the data (OK push button) or to print thedata (Print push button).
b ) Multiple columns lists.
They display the data in the form of multiple columns. An example is given below.
Figure 20. Multiple List box.
You can choose from the list the item you wish, and if possible, using the menu bar options undertakecertain operations concerning the item (i.e.: see next figure for the CPI3 selected).
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
64
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
Figure 21. After choosing in a Multiple list box.
2.8.3 Message and Confirmation dialogue boxes
They display messages and information. They require a confirmation of the action to undertake. Generally,work is suspended till the dialogue box is closed. This means that you first have to click on thecorresponding button (OK, Cancel, Help or other options) before resuming operations.
The different types are shown in the figures below:
Figure 22. Error dialogue box.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
65
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
These dialogue boxes (error) inform the operator of an illegal command or action.
These dialogue boxes are displayed to warn the operator about future events pertaining to the action hehas launched.
Figure 23. Work in progress dialogue box.
These dialogue boxes indicate that work is in progress and that the operator may resume operations only whenthe work is over. The dialogue box may close automatically or the operator may have to click on a push buttonto close it.
Figure 24. Question dialogue box.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
66
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
A question dialogue box requests additional confirmation following a command previously launched. TheCancel push button cancels the operation.
Figure 25. Information dialogue box.
The information dialog box gives indication on the action the operator has undertaken.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
67
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
SOFTWARE INSTALLATION
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
68
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
69
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
3 SOFTWARE INSTALLATION
3.1 Scope of the procedure
The aim of this chapter is to describe the installation of the software product referred to the NetworkElement in the Craft Terminal.
3.2 Start–up of the Personal Computer
The PC is started with the relevant switch
At this point the Windows application (Windows NT, Windows 2000 or Windows XP) starts automatically(if software has been correctly installed) and the operator views the Windows desktop.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
70
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
3.3 Installation Phases of the craft terminal management SW
3.3.1 Scope of the procedure
The procedure describes how to install the software required by the Craft Terminal to manage the relevantNetwork Element and how to de–install it, if necessary.Administrator privileges are needed to install and de–install the Craft Terminal software package.
3.3.2 Installation phases
Unless otherwise specified, the installation procedure description , detailed in the followingparagraphs is applicable to Windows NT Windows 2000 and Windows XP environment.
The management software to install in the Craft Terminal is contained in a Compact Disk (CD–ROM),supplied by Alcatel.The part number of this product is inserted in the Operator’s Handbook dedicated to the Network Elementinvolved.As an alternative it can be received from a service distribution site managed by the customer, via thenetwork interconnection of the Craft Terminal.
In order to guarantee the correct operation the Craft Terminal software package installationmust be made in same PC disk partition.
The sequence of windows presented during the installation differs according to software and selectionconditions:
• first installation, without Craft Terminal software previously installed in the PC
• installation with Craft Terminal software of previous or same version already installed in the PC
• installation with Craft Terminal software of more recent version already installed in the PC
• all the software packages previously installed are different
• only one or some software components of the software packages previously installed aredifferent
• the operator selects to maintain the previously installed software component
• the operator selects to de–install the previously installed software component
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
71
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
To install the software in the correct mode, execute the following operations:
1 ) Insert the CD–ROM disk in the CD–ROM drive (example E).
2 ) The installation program automatically starts and after an intermediate screen (Figure 26. ) ,the“Select Components” box screen of Figure 27. appears:
Figure 26. Intermediate screen
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
72
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
Figure 27. Selecting installation procedure.
3 ) The above view permits to select the following options:
– Installation of the Craft Terminal software product (first option)
– De–installation of the Craft Terminal software product, complete or partial (second option)
– Quit, exiting the installation (third option)
In our example we will select the first option.
Click on Next button to access the next dialog box. Figure 28. will be opened
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
73
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
Figure 28. Craft Terminal master setup list
4 ) The screen lists the Software Component contained in the disks.
Click OK to present next dialog box:
Figure 29. Selecting component to install
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
74
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
5 ) This view permits to select the software components to install.
The software product to install is made up of several layers.
The operator can decide to install ALL the software products by pressing the button Select All(by default they are already selected) or a single part composing it by pressing first the ClearAll button and subsequently by adding a tick in the square relevant to the component to add.
– The first components contains the Java software product (JRE 1.3).
– The second and third components contain the basic software for the platform (”CT–K Rel.3.0.1” and “Alcatel –Lower–Layer V.2.0.1” in the example of Figure 29. )
– The fourth component contains the software common for a “family” of NEs.In the example of Figure 29. a common software for Add Drop Multiplexer andMultiService Node NEs is indicated (”COMMON USM REL 4.2.0”). This example ofFigure 29. will be used in the following.
– The fifth component contains the NE Specific software able to manage the referred NE (inthe example of Figure 29. the “NE SPECIFIC 1660SM V 5.0”).
– The sixth component contains the “NECTAS V 4.11” software to manage QB3* NEs withthe same PC that manages the Q3 InfoModel NE.
– The seventh component contains the “QB3* MEDIATION FUNCTION V 1.0” software tomanage Q2 NEs connected to QB3* NEs.
– The last component contains the “Q3CT–K–ADD–ON V3.0.3.
In our example we will select ALL THE CT PRODUCT and click Next.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
75
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
Figure 30. Java licence agreement acceptance
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
76
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
6 ) The Java installation procedure starts and after intermediate automatic screens the Javalicence agreement acceptance is presented.
Press Yes button and next figure appears
Figure 31. Java component installation: choose destination folder
7 ) This view proposes the default directory for the installation.
The Browse button can be used to change the proposed directory.
The next button starts the installation (see the following figure).
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
77
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
Figure 32. Java component download
8 ) The Java component download is indicated in the scroll bar of the percentage.At the end of the process the program automatically presents the screens that permit to startthe installation procedure for the second software component (CT–K Rel. xxx ).
On the contrary, with the selection of only one software component the screen of Figure 71. onpage 104 is presented; here it is possible to “quit” the installation or to continue it selectinganother software component in the windows that follow.
This operation mode is the same for all the software components.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
78
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
According to the installation conditions, the installation evolution can be (point a, b, c and d):
a ) First installation, without Craft Terminal software previously installed: afterintermediate views the screen of the component installation appears. (In the example isFigure 40. on page 82) (go to point 9 ).
b ) Craft Terminal software already installed with more recent version: after intermediateviews the screen of Figure 33. appears .
This question box asks to confirm installation when a more recent file is present.
Figure 33. Install with more recent version confirmation (example)
After confirmation (or not) Figure 40. is presented.
This option is not given for 1320NX (Nectas), and QB3* Mediation Function components.It is different for Lower Layer Manager component.
c ) Craft Terminal software already installed with same version: after intermediate viewsthe screen of next Figure 34. will be displayed.
Figure 34. Craft Terminal kernel Setup – Maintenance setup dialog
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
79
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
The dialog box permits to:
• 1– Modify the software product; this option is not allowed in current release.• 2– Repair the software product by re–Installing it• 3– Remove all installed components.
Selecting the second option (Repair) and pressing Next a maintenance procedure startsthat allows to re–install the software components; at the end Figure 35. will be presented.
Figure 35. Repair CT–K maintenance procedure (example)
Select the Finish button. Figure 40. will be presented.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
80
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
Figure 36. Internet browser choice
Choose the preferred browser and click Next to continue.
Now a ”customization phase” occurs, the installation program has to tailor some scripts andother config/settings to your particular machine.This happens in a DOS window which appears on the installation screen.
Figure 37. CT–K Customization
At the end of the customization phase, Figure 48. on page will be displayed.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
81
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
d ) Craft Terminal software already installed with previous version: after intermediateviews the screen of Figure 38. appears.
Figure 38. Selecting installation mode with previous version already installed software
The view of Figure 38. is referred to the second software component (Craft TerminalKernel)The dialog box permits to:
• 1– Install the software product deleting the previously installed ones• 2– Quit the installation
Selecting the first option (delete previous installed) and pressing Next, Figure 39. ispresented.
Figure 39. Un–install evolution procedure (example)
At the end of the deleting process Figure 40. is presented (go to point 9 ).
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
82
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
Figure 40. Information on the Info Model Craft Terminal Platform applicative to install.
9 ) This view describes the second applicative to install.
A few recommendations and a briefing of what will happen is displayed in this window.
The Next button leads to the following view.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
83
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
Figure 41. Component installation: choose destination folder
10 ) The procedure proposes the default directory for the installation.
The Browse button can be used to change the proposed directory.Select next button to see next figure;
During installation, several demo bitmaps are shown on the screen (see Figure 42. next as anexample):
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
84
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
Figure 42. Demo bitmap during installation: example
11 ) If both Netscape Navigator and Internet Explorer are present the following figure is showed.If instead only one out of the two is installed no message is given and Figure 46. appears.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
85
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
Figure 43. Netscape Navigator or Internet Explorer selection
Click Next to continue.
12 ) The next dialog box ask for a check on the USM product.If the operator click on Yes the program check which USM versions are already installed ( goto point 13 ).On the contrary clicking on No Figure 46. will be opened (go to point 14 )
Figure 44. USM recovery question box
13 ) At the end of the search phase a list of all USM product already installed is shown (Figure 45. is an example)
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
86
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
Figure 45. USM security data files recovery selection dialog box
To proceed leave selected the USM products, whose FAD and IMPORT data files are to berecovered, and click the Next button.
14 ) Now a ”customization phase” occurs, the installation program has to tailor some scripts andother config/settings to your particular machine.This happens in a DOS window which appears on the installation screen.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
87
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
Figure 46. Customization phase
15 ) The DOS window does all necessary operations (you can see a report of what’s going on).
If another CT–K– Add on components has been detected (for example belonging to a previousinstallation) Figure 47. will be displayed, otherwise Figure 48. is presented.
Figure 47. CT–K–Add on re–install question
Click on Yes button to restore the previously installed Add–on components otherwise click onNo button.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
88
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
Figure 48. Installation completed.
Press OK and you’ll leave the second software component installation program.
Having selected the “complete” installation of all the software products the screen of next figureis automatically presented after transitory views, permitting to start the installation procedurefor the third software component (Lower Layer Manager).
On the contrary, with the selection of only one software component the screen of Figure 71. onpage 104 is presented; here it is possible to “quit” the installation or to continue the installationselecting another software component in the subsequent windows.
This operation mode is the same for all the software component.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
89
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
Figure 49. Lower Layer Manager installation, first view.
16 ) This is a welcome box. Click Next.
According to the installation conditions, the installation evolution can be:
– First installation: the component installation starts ( go to point 18 ) and, when completed,the Figure 52. is presented.
– Software component already installed: a select component view is presented.The option list of the screen slowly differs according the version of the component: morerecent version, same version, previous version. In the example of Figure 50. the sameversion will be installed.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
90
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
Figure 50. Lower Layer Manager installation, select component view.
17 ) The view permits to select the following options:
– Maintaining current setting, without installing– Repair, maintaining current setting– Reinstall, loosing current setting– De–install current setting, without installing
Select one option and then click Next to start the installation. At the end next Figure 51. ispresented.
18 ) This window ( Figure 51. ) asks for “Lower Layer Manager” settings and “Display the LowerLayers IP Manager installation guide”. Put a tick in the square relevant to the function to be setand click Finish to access next setting view (Figure 52. ).If “Display the Lower Layers IP Manager installation guide” has been selected also window ofFigure 53. will be opened.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
91
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
Figure 51. “Lower Layer Manager” and “Lower Layers IP Manager installation guide” selection
Figure 52. Lower layer manager setting view
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
92
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
19 ) Here it is possible to select the correct setting (refer to para. 3.4.4 on page 116).
20 ) Click OK to go to the next windows that allows to configure the Lower Layers IP Managerinstallation guide.
The Lower Layers IP Manager installation guide (refer to Figure 53. ) allows to install theAlcatel Network Interface Card that is a Software component used to manage TCP/IP framesthrough Alcatel Lower Layers Manager; during this procedure an IP address is assign to theCOM port of the PC used as Craft Terminal; this connection is used for communication purposebetween the PC and the Equipment Controller unit when the ISA Boards are inserted in theEquipment Shelf .
Figure 53. Alcatel Virtual Network card for Lower Layers Help
To correctly configure the Lower Layer IP, select the installation help according to the OperatingSystem working on your Personal Computer (WINDOWS NT or WINDOWS 2000) and followsthe instruction.
At the end of the third component installation, Figure 54. will be opened.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
93
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
Figure 54. Common Adm Usm Destination Location
21 ) The fourth component installation (Common Adm Usm in the example) will start clicking Next.Figure 55. will be opened.
Note: for this installation will be presented a sequence of views similar to the second componentinstallation, to be confirmed clicking Next , OK and Any Key in the DOS window.
22 ) During installation, several demo bitmaps are shown on the screen (see Figure 55. );sometimes DOS windows are presented asking the operator to press any Key to continue.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
94
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
Figure 55. Common ADM USM: example of copying files automatic sequence
Completed the installation of the fourth component, then the program will present similar viewsto install:
– the software component (fifth) able to manage the Specific NE (see Figure 56. )
The installation is similar to the previous ones, the various views must be confirmed clickingNext or OK.This product must be installed after the Common ADM USM component (fourth) of the sameCD–ROM.For each component it is also possible to “Quit” the installation.
Examples of these views are presented in the following figures.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
95
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
Figure 56. Example of Specific NE management software component to install
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
96
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
23 ) After having completed the installation of the the “Software specific NE” (example ALCATELADM 1660SM 5.0), then the program will present the following view to install the 1320 NXsoftware component.This component contains the NECTAS software that permits to manage QB3* NEs from thesame PC that manages Q3 Info Model NE.
Figure 57. 1320NX (NECTAS) installation, first view.
24 ) Select Next button to enter the installation program, showing the following view:
Figure 58. 1320NX (NECTAS) installation, select component.
25 ) Select all the components but the Multi–PM application.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
97
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
Click Next to pass to next figure.
Figure 59. 1320NX (NECTAS) installation, option
26 ) Choose the Communication port and select (�) “Installation to CT_IM”
Click Next to present the following figure.
Figure 60. 1320NX (NECTAS) installation, choose the directory.
27 ) Select the installation directory for NECTAS component, default “Alcatel”.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
98
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
Click Next to start the installation.
During this phase, the download percentage is indicated.
Figure 61. 1320NX (NECTAS) installation percentage
At the end of the installation next view appears.
Figure 62. 1320NX (NECTAS) installation completed.
28 ) The complete installation of the NECTAS component is indicated: select NO I will restartmy computer later and click on Finish to pass to the next figure.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
99
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
29 ) After having completed the installation of the NECTAS software component, then the programwill present the following view to install the QB3* Mediation Function software component.
This component permits to manage QB2 NEs connected to QB3* NEs.
Figure 63. QB3*Mediation Function installation, choose directory
30 ) The procedure proposes the default directory for the installation.
The Browse button can be used to change the proposed directory.
Select next button to start the QB3* Mediation Function installation.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
100
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
During this phase, the download percentage is indicated.
Figure 64. QB3* Mediation Function installation percentage
31 ) Then the following view is presented, where the mediation function to install can be selected.
When more then one selections are present on the view (like in the example) the installationmust be repeated for each one.
Figure 65. QB3* MF Installation selection
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
101
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
32 ) Select and Click OK. The following appears, asking the installation directory.
Figure 66. QB3* MF Installation directory
33 ) Select Continue to finish the setup as indicated in the next figure.
Figure 67. QB3* MF End Setup
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
102
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
34 ) Click OK to obtain next
Figure 68. QB3* MF: press any key to continue
35 ) Pressing any key the complete installation view appears
Figure 69. QB3* MF: Installation completed
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
103
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
36 ) At the end of QB3* MF installation, the Q3CT–K–ADD–ON packet will be automatically started(refer to the following view):
Figure 70. Q3CT–K–ADD–ON
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
104
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
37 ) Click on the OK button, the following view is shown:
Figure 71. Quit the installation
Select Quit and click next to exit the installation procedure.
Before you can use the program , you must restart Windows or your Computer.
At this point the installation is completed; it can be verified checking the “1320CT<version>”short–key opening “Start” , as for the following figure.
Figure 72. 1320CT short–key
You are now ready to start the 1320 CT system.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
105
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
If the user needs to recover useful data recorded during previously installed platform Q3CT–P(this means that the user is migrating from Q3CT–P to CT–K package), he can, by running theQ3CT–P Data Backup option of the Start–>Programs–>Alcatel–> 1320CT Backup &Restore Tools –> Q3CT–P Data Backup menu and subsequently theStart–>Programs–>Alcatel–> 1320CT Backup & Restore Tools –>System Restore.
For details about backup and restore procedure refer to SECTION 4 of this Operator’sHandbook.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
106
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
3.3.3 De–installation phases
This paragraph describes how to de–install from the PC the Software Package required by the CraftTerminal to manage the relevant Network Element.
This can be useful, for example, when a version of the software package is no more updated.
To de–install the following procedure can be followed:
• With the CD–ROM containing the relevant Software product.
• With the Control Panel of WINDOWS NT or WINDOWS 2000 when the CD–ROM containingthe relevant Software product is not present.This procedure is compulsory for Java, 1320NX (Nectas) and QB3*Mediation Functioncomponents.
Also when clearing any directory or sub directory created in the Alcatel directory, it is necessaryto de–install before the relevant components with one of the procedures described in thefollowing.
3.3.3.1 De–installation procedure with CD–ROM
To de–install the software with CD–ROM in the correct mode, execute the following operations:
1 ) Insert the CD–ROM disk in the CD–ROM drive (example E).
2 ) The installation program automatically starts and after an intermediate screen (Figure 73. ) ,the“Select Components” box screen of Figure 74. appears:
Figure 73. Intermediate screen
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
107
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
Figure 74. Selecting de–installation procedure.
3 ) In this view select the CT Product de–installation option
Next step is accessed by pressing the relevant button.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
108
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
Figure 75. Selecting component to de–install
4 ) This view permits to select the software component to de–install.
The software product is made up of several layers.
The operator can decide to de–install ALL the software products by pressing the button SelectAll (by default they are already selected) or a single part composing it by pressing first the ClearAll button and subsequently by adding a tick in the square relevant to the component tode–install.
Select one option and click Next, showing next confirmation box.
Figure 76. Delete confirmation (example)
After confirmation next figure (example) is presented indicating the deleting process.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
109
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
Figure 77. Delete completed (example)
At the end of the deleting process click OK.
Having selected one software component to delete, the Quit view of next figure is presented.Having selected ALL the software components, the same figure is shown after all the deletingprocesses.
Figure 78. Quit the installation
Select Quit and click next to exit the de–installation procedure.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
110
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
3.3.3.2 De–installation procedure with WINDOWS NT or WINDOWS 2000
To de–install the software with WINDOWS NT or WINDOWS 2000 in the correct mode, execute thefollowing operations:
1 ) Open the Control Panel and select the Add / Remove Programs icon, as for the following figure.
WINDOWS NT
WINDOWS 2000and
WINDOWS XP
Figure 79. Add / Remove Programs icon selection
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
111
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
2 ) After the selection next window appears:
WINDOWS NT
WINDOWS 2000
and
WINDOWS XP
Figure 80. Add / Remove Programs view (examples)
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
112
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
3 ) In the Install / Uninstall tab (for WINDOWS NT) or “Add/Remove Program” (for WINDOWS2000) of this window select the applications starting with the Alcatel denomination (CraftTerminal software component) and click respectively on the Add Remove button (forWINDOWS NT)or Change/ Remove button (for WINDOWS 2000) .A confirmation message is presented.
Figure 81. Delete confirmation (example)
4 ) After confirmation next figure (example) appears, indicating the deleting process.
Figure 82. Delete completed (example)
At the end of the deleting process click OK.
Then it is possible to de–install other Alcatel Craft Terminal software components or close thewindow exiting the procedure.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
113
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
3.4 Craft terminal configuration
3.4.1 Scope of the procedure
The procedure describes how to configure the PC in order to manage the Network Element.
3.4.2 Configuration issues
The Craft terminal configuration is subdivided in the following way:
• PC hostname
• CT configuration
• Communication Protocol (TCP/IP)
– TCP/IP without a network card
– TCP/IP with a network card
– Switching between the two configurations
In this chapter is also inserted a paragraph which describes the possible indication referred to the:
• Serial Communication with the NE
Finally are inserted the:
• Screen settings
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
114
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
3.4.3 PC hostname
The installation of “Windows NT” Operating system requires the assignment of a ”Computer Name” whichmust be filled in.
A PC configured with the TCP/IP protocol has also another name called ”Hostname”. Its relationship withthe Computer Name is the following:
• in the TCP/IP configuration the Computer Name is assigned by default also as Hostname• the TCP/IP hostname can be then changed using the Network configuration > Protocols >
TCP/IP Properties
Note: In Windows 2000/Windows XP Operating system the “Host Name” coincides with the “ComputerName” , so only the field “Computer Name” must be filled in.
The CT installation procedure reads the hostname in order to set its configuration files.If the TCP/IP “hostname” (in Windows NT) or “Computer Name” (in Windows 2000) is changed after theCT installation, the CT will not work any more.In order to let the CT know the hostname/Computer Name change, the following command must beexecuted:
– USM Customization (refer to Figure 83. )
– CTK –> Customization (refer to Figure 84. )
– Q3 Add On Customization (refer to Figure 85. )
Figure 83. USM Customization command
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
115
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
Figure 84. CT–K customization command
Figure 85. Q3 ADD ON Customization
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
116
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
3.4.4 CT configuration
The CT configuration for the communication with the NE can be changed opening the Control Panel andselecting the Alcatel Lower Layers settings icon, as for the following figure.
Figure 86. Selecting Alcatel Lower Layers settings icon
Double click on it, showing next figure.
Figure 87. Defining Alcatel Lower Layers settings data (Serial Port / IP tunnel)
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
117
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
The CT communicates with the NE using the OSI protocol over the serial link (COM port) or as alternativeover an IP network (tunnel IP); in the last case it is mandatory to have a network card to use the CT.
The selection between the two mode can be made in the mask depicted in Figure 87.
The panel of Figure 87. allows to define:
[1] The System identifier.The system identifier is requested because the 1320CT plays the role of End System in the OSInetworking . Therefore it needs a unique NSAP address. The operator has to enter only theSystem ID field because the Area Address port of the NSAP address is automatically retrievedby the connected NE. The Craft Terminal becomes a new ES of the same area of the local NE.
[2] The COM port used for connecting the serial cable. If the PC has two serial ports on the back side , you can discover which is the COM port (COM1or COM2) simply by assigning a value and then connecting the CT and the NE. If the connectionis active (see para. 3.4.7 on page 153) the port is valid.
[3] The Tunnel IP address (refer to Figure 91. example).Define and displays the IP address of the tunnel end point; in order to communicate with theNE through an IP Network it is also necessary to complete the following data in the USM of theCraft Terminal (refer to the Operator’s Handbook for details):
a ) Set an IP address to the NE with the menu Configuration–>Comm. Routing–>InterfacesConfiguration–>Ethernet Configuration (refer to Figure 88. as example)
Figure 88. Ethernet configuration (example)
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
118
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
b ) Set the IP Computer Address with the menu Configuration–>Comm. Routing–>IP StaticRouting Configuration (refer to Figure 89. as example)
Figure 89. IP Static Routing Configuration (example)
c ) Set the “Tunnel OSI over IP” option (it is the C.T. destination address) with the menuConfiguration–>Comm. Routing–> OSI over IP. (refer to Figure 90. as example)
Figure 90. OSI over IP configuration (example)
Using the ”Help” it is possible to know more about the meaning and format of the requested data.The same panel is also called when the CT software is installed on the PC. If an installation has alreadybe done, the previously assigned values are proposed for confirmation.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
119
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
IP Network
Router(default Gateway)
SDH+ATMNE
Gateway NE
SDH+ATM
SDH
SDH+ATM
F
F
QB3
QECC
QECC
QECCQECC
QECC
QECC
F
F
F
LAPD
OSI
SNMP
802.3
LAPD
OSILAPD
OSISNMP
LAPD
OSI
SNMPOSILAPD
(GNE)
SDH–CT
ATM–CT&
SDH–OS (OSI)
ATM–OS (SNMP)&
Interface
Interface
Remote C.T.with Network card
Local C.T.
Local C.T.
SDH–CT
151.98.41.182255.255.248.0
151.98.43.68255.255.248.0
151.98.40.01
OS
LAPD
NE
NE
SDHNE
NE
Figure 91. C.T.–> N.E. communication via IP Network
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
120
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
3.4.5 Lower Layer IP
If not executed during the Craft Terminal installation phases, the Lower Layers IP Manager Setup Helpoption (from the Start –> Program–>Alcatel–>Lower Layers see Figure 92. ) allows to install the AlcatelNetwork Interface Card that is a Software component used to manage TCP/IP frames through AlcatelLower Layers Manager; during this procedure an IP address is assign to the COM port of the PC usedas Craft Terminal; this connection is used for communication purpose between the PC and the EquipmentController unit when the ISA Boards are inserted in the Equipment Shelf .To install the Lower Layers IP Manager run the Program–>Alcatel–>Lower Layers –>Lower Layers IPManager Setup Help and follows the instruction according to the Windows Operating System.
Figure 92. Lower Layers IP Manager Setup
3.4.6 Communication Protocol (TCP/IP)However the CT is composed of a set of working processes which communicate between them using theTCP/IP message protocol. So it is necessary to configure the WINDOWS host with the TCP/IPprotocol enabled.In the following paragraphs this configuration activity is described along with the switching mode betweenthe two basic configurations (PC with and without a network card).Of course the need of switching between the two configurations (frequently or not) is mainly related to aportable PC which can be used connected or not connected to the company network.
N.B. In the following sections are reported some snapshots of the windows and dialog boxes shownby WINDOWS during the configuration procedures. In some cases the snapshot may differunder different systems because some data is specific (the specific network card adapter, thehost name, the IP address, ..).
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
121
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
3.4.6.1 TCP/IP without a network card
This paragraph describes how to configure the WINDOWS NT and WINDOWS 2000 host for the TCP/IPprotocol if the PC does not have a network card.However this configuration must be considered even if the PC can be used at different times with andwithout a network connection active (see para 3.4.6.3 on page 147.)The protocol is configured by creating a network device (a Modem installation) and only for WINDOWSNT also configuring the RAS service (Remote Access Service). Only the “modem configuration” is needed(you don’t need a real modem).
N.B. During RAS installation procedure, WINDOWS NT asks for the presence of the NT CD–ROMif the RAS services has not already been configured and if the TCP–IP has not already beeninstalled.
3.4.6.1.1 Configuring a Modem with WINDOWS NT
Open the Control Panel and select the Modems icon as for the following figure.
Figure 93. Selecting Modems icon WINDOWS NT
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
122
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
Double click on the Modems icon. The following window appears:
Figure 94. Don’t detect my modem... selection.
In this window, toggle ON on the Don’t detect my modem; I will select it from a list and then select Next>,showing the following figure.
Figure 95. Modem type selection
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
123
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
Accept the default proposed by NT (Manufactures : [Standard Modem Types] , Models : Dial–UpNetworking Serial Cable between 2 PCs...) then select Next > presenting the following.
Figure 96. Ports selection
Toggle ON on the Selected ports and choose the port (e.g. COM2)
N.B. It is better NOT to choose the same COM port used by the CT configuration (see para.3.4.4 onpage 116 ) even if no problems have been reported if the same port is being used.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
124
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
Select Next > entering the following figure.
Figure 97. Finish modem installation
Select Finish to obtain the last window.
Figure 98. Close Modem installation
Click on the Close button to finish the modem configuration activity.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
125
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
3.4.6.1.2 Configuring a Modem with WINDOWS 2000/ WINDOWS XP
Open the Control Panel and select the Modems icon as for the following figure.
Figure 99. Selecting Modems icon with WINDOWS 2000
Double click on the Modems icon. The following window appears:
Figure 100. Location information
Fill in the location information and then press the Ok button. Figure 101. will be opened
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
126
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
Figure 101. Phone and Modem Option
Select the Modem Tab and then click on the Add button; Figure 102. will be opened.
Figure 102. Install New modem
In this window, toggle ON on the Don’t detect my modem; I will select it from a list and then select Next>,showing the following figure.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
127
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
Figure 103. Modem type selection
Accept the default proposed by WINDOWS 2000 (Manufactures : [Standard Modem Types] , Models :Communication cable between two computers) then select Next > presenting the following.
Figure 104. Ports selection
Toggle ON on the Selected ports and choose the port (e.g. COM2)
N.B. It is better NOT to choose the same COM port used by the CT configuration (see para.3.4.4 onpage 116 ) even if no problems have been reported if the same port is being used.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
128
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
Figure 105. Finish Modem installation
Select Finish to obtain the last window.
Figure 106. Close Modem installation
Click on the Ok button to finish the modem configuration activity.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
129
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
3.4.6.1.3 Configuring the RAS service
RAS service is mandatory only with WINDOWS NT; it is not required for WINDOWS 2000.
Open the Control Panel and select the Network icon as for the following figure.
Figure 107. Selecting Network icon.
Double click on it, showing next figure.
Figure 108. Selecting Add Services in the list.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
130
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
Then in the Services option select Add (if the ”Remote Access Service” is not already in the list ofconfigured services, otherwise check only how it is configured)
Figure 109. Remote Access Service selection
Select Remote Access Service, then click OK to show the following.
Figure 110. NT CD–ROM request.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
131
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
The NT CD–ROM is requested inside your CD driver. Also in the following this CD can be requested withthe same window. Click on Continue when the NT CD is inside the CD–ROM drive.
Figure 111. Display the service configuration
After the installation of the service from the CD–ROM, NT displays the service configuration. The resultof the modem installation activity (para 3.4.6.1.1 on page 121) is shown.
Click on ”Continue” to have next figure.
Figure 112. RAS protocol access
Then click on ”OK”
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
132
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
Figure 113. TCP/IP selection
Toggle ON the ”TCP/IP” option, then click on OK.
After that, if the TCP/IP has not already been installed on the system, NT installs it from the CD–ROM andat the end it requests for a system restart.
Click on ”OK” at the restart request and then check the resulting configuration as for the following para.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
133
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
3.4.6.1.4 Check the configuration
The resulting configuration should be inspected opening the Network icon from the Control Panel.
WINDOWS NT
N.B. The content of the following windows is as resulting from the above configuration activity (RASwith TCP)
Select the Identification tab:
Figure 114. Check computer name with WINDOWS NT
the host must have a ”Computer Name” (see para. 3.4.3 on page 114).
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
134
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
Select the Services tab:
Figure 115. Check services with RAS
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
135
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
The ”Remote Access Service” is in the list of configured services. Now select the Protocols tab:
Figure 116. Check TCP/IP protocol
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
136
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
The ”TCP/IP Protocol” is in the list of configured protocols. Click on Properties:
Figure 117. Check host name on DNS of Properties
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
137
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
On DNS tab the host name has been assigned automatically by NT taking it from ”Computer Name”.No other data on DNS tab.Select the WINS Address tab:
Figure 118. Check WINS Address of Properties
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
138
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
Nothing assigned automatically by NT, but the toggle Enable LMHOSTS Lookup is on. This is the defaultassignment by NT but it is not meaningful for the CT.Select the Routing tab:
Figure 119. Check Routing of Properties
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
139
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
Click on OK.
In the “Network” window select now the Bindings tab:
Figure 120. Check RAS in Bindings tab.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
140
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
The ”Remote Access Server Service” must be in the list. Select the Adapter option:
Figure 121. Check Adapters tab.
No adapters (Network card driver) are configured in such case. Note that as in para 3.4.6.3 on page 147for the “switching between the two configurations” the TCP protocol, the adapter and the other networkconfiguration parameters can be also configured in a different way. In this case, if the user selects a ”NONetwork” boot configuration, the system will ignore them, thus the configuration with the TCP/IP + RAS+ Modem is in charge of the TCP/IP protocol.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
141
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
3.4.6.2 TCP/IP with a network card
WINDOWS NT
This paragraph simply reports the result of a system inspection of the configuration. The systemadministrator is normally in charge of configuring the Network when the PC is used connected to a LAN.The aim of this paragraph is to let an operator check the system configuration in case of malfunctionassuming that:
• The network card is inside the PC (normally in the PCMCIA or PCCard slot for a portable)
• The network card is working properly
• The network card is connected to the company network
• The company network is working properly (for example the DNS hosts are reachable and theywork)
Note that the miscellaneous cases of malfunctions related to the network can be bypassed for the CToperations by booting using a ”NO network” configuration (see para. 3.4.6.3 on page 147).
Open the Control Panel and select the Network icon as for the following figure.
Figure 122. Selecting Network icon
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
142
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
Double click on it, showing next figure.
Check for the presence of an Adapter.
Figure 123. Check Adapter on Network
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
143
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
One adapter software is configured. This can be a generic software adapter or the specific adapteraccompanying the specific network card.Thus the string ”[4] 3Com EtherLink III (3C589) LAN PC Card” may differ from the one shown by yoursystem.Select Protocol to check the TCP/IP protocol settings as the following.
Figure 124. Check TCP/IP Protocol on Network
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
144
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
Then click Properties... showing next figure.
Figure 125. Check TCP/IP Properties
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
145
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
The adapter string is reported also inside the TCP/IP IP Address form.The system has an IP address assigned, a Subnet mask as well as an optional Default Gateway. Allsettings for these parameters depend on your system and company policies.Select DSN tab:
Figure 126. Check DSN
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
146
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
The system has a host name and a Domain. It may have one or more DNS services addresses in the listDNS Service Search Order.Select WINS Address tab:
Figure 127. Check WINS Address
Also the WINS Address data can be present. The CT is not impacted by the WINS address.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
147
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
3.4.6.3 Switching between the configurations
WINDOWS NT
The Craft Terminal may be used in a system sometimes connected to a company network and sometimesnot.In order to support that, the system must have both the configurations described above (TCP/IP withouta net card and TCP/IP with a net card ) but this is not sufficient to let the CT work properly (it may be slowor it can even fail the start–up).To complete the configuration you must create two systems configurations and you have to (re)boot thesystem choosing the configuration according to your use.In the following sections the configuration with the network connection enabled is called OriginalConfiguration and NoNetwork is the configuration that has to be selected when the system must bebooted and operates without being connected to the network.
3.4.6.3.1 Creating a configuration with the network disabled
WINDOWS NT
You can create a secondary host configuration, called NoNetwork with the following procedure.
Select the My Computer on the NT Desktop. Right click on it and select Properties on the popup. Thefollowing window appears.
Figure 128. System properties
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
148
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
Select Hardware Profiles to obtain the following figure
Figure 129. Hardware Profiles of System Properties
Select the ”Original Configuration” and click on Copy.... The following ”Copy Profile” window appears andyou can change the ”To:” default value to ”NoNetwork”. The name of the new configuration is not importantbut you will have to remember its meaning.
Figure 130. Copy profile
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
149
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
Confirm with OK, showing next window, where the new created profile is indicated.
Figure 131. Hardware Profiles of System Properties with ”NoNetwork”
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
150
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
Select the new ”NoNetwork” configuration and then click on Properties... presenting next figure.
Figure 132. ”NoNetwork” properties – 1
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
151
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
This window has (General tab) already the toggle active on This is a portable computer if it is a portablecomputer. This assignment does not affect the Craft Terminal.Select Network to present the following figure.
Figure 133. ”NoNetwork” properties – 2
The important thing is to set the toggle ON on Network disabled hardware profile.Then with OK the configuration is created and available as option for the next boot.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
152
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
3.4.6.3.2 How to switch between the configurations
WINDOWS NT
To switch between the two configurations the system must be re–booted (it is not necessary to power offthe system).
At system boot time, and after having selected ”NT version 4.0”, the boot procedure will ask for theconfiguration to select if two or more are possible.
Choose ”NoNetwork” if the CT must operate without the network connection active or ”OriginalConfiguration” if it is connected to the network.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
153
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
3.4.7 Communication with NE
When the CT has to operate it is important to know if the communication with the NE is working.
In the following picture the ”communication is NOT OK”.
Figure 134. Serial Communication NOT OK
In the ”Network Element Synthesis” window the local NE is represented as unplugged.
In the ”Alcatel Lower Layer Manager” window :
• The ”Port” indicates the configured COM port and its bit rate or the “IP Network” message ifa tunnel has been configurated (Refer to para.3.4.4 on page 116 for details)
• The ”Physical” link with value ” ” red indicates that the serial connection is physically broken:
– The serial cable is absent– The serial cable is not connected with the correct port of the PC– The serial cable is not connected to the serial port of the NE– The serial cable is broken
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
154
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
• The ”OSI” link with value ” ” red indicates that the OSI serial connection is logically broken:
– the logical OSI link is always “ ” red if the physical link is “ ” red
– if the physical is “ ” green , logical “ ” red indicates that the connection with the NEapplication is broken:
• The NE software is restarting (temporary situation)• The NE software is not able to start (if the situation is stable for some minutes)
If the OSI link is “ ” grey indicates that the NE is not reachable.
• The ”IP” link with value ” ” red indicates that the IP connection is logically broken:
– the logical IP link is always ” ” red if the physical link is ” ” red
– if the physical is “ ” green, IP ” ” red indicates that the connection with the NEapplication is broken:
• The NE software is restarting (temporary situation)• The IP Address Configuration of Point to Point Interfaces has not been set• The Lower Layer IP Manager has not been set
If the IP link is “ ” indicates that the NE is not reachable.
• The “Nectas” link with value ” ” red indicates that the NECTAS application has not been run
by the operator. The Nectas link goes on “ ” green automatically when the operator click withthe mouse on the NECTAS icon.
– the Nectas link is always ” ” red if the physical link is ” ” red
If the NECTAS link is “ ” grey indicates that the NE is not reachable.
• The “Local” ,“Adjacent”, “Mask” and “Subnet” IP Network addresses are unknown(”Waiting...”).“Local” refers to the IP address assigned to Craft Terminal (COM port or network card), while“Adjacent” refers to the IP address of the Network Element (for example the IP address of theEquipment Controller unit in 1660SM).This can be also a temporary situation during the CT start–up.The “Mask” and “Subnet” are assigned by the operator during the Lower Layer IP Managersetting in the installation phase; this two fields are visible only if a COM port has been selectedto communicate with the Network Element.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
155
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
• The “Local” and “Adjacent” OSI Network addresses are unknown (”Waiting...”).“Local” refers to the Craft Terminal, while “Adjacent” refers to the Network Element.This can be also a temporary situation during the CT start–up, but if the situation is stable andthe ”Link” is On, this means that the CT and the NE are not able of exchanging the addressesinformation (the Local is computed from the Adjacent as explained in ”CT configuration” , thusthis means that the CT stack is not able of obtaining its address from the NE).
• Options box gives the following information:
– Clients: shows the number of applications using Lower Layer Manager
– The icon , shows the communication status; It is a copy of the icon in the taskbar’sstatus area. The possible states are :
1) while the physical link between the computer and the equipment is missing, the crossed
icon blinks;
2) during the attempts to establish the communication between the computer and the
connected equipment the red icon blinks;
3) while the communication between the computer and the connected equipment is
established the red icon turns.
– Sound: enable/disable sound message
– Auto Shut Down: enable/disable auto shut down; If auto–shutdown modality is enabledyou do not need to push Shut Down button: the program terminates itself when it is not nolonger needed.
In the following picture the ”communication is OK”
In the ”Network Element Synthesis” window the local NE is represented as plugged.
In the ”Alcatel Lower Layer Manager” window are shown the addresses and link situation.
The other fields are not referred to the communication status and doesn’t interest the operator.
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
156
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
Figure 135. Serial Communication OK
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
157
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
3.4.8 Screen setting
The color palette should be configured with more than 256 colors. If 256 colors are configured the CTapplication is not able of showing correctly all the needed colors.In the following is indicated how to check or change the color configuration.
Open the “Control Panel” and select the “Display” icon.
Figure 136. Screen setting –1
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
158
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
Double click on it and select the ”Settings” panel.
Figure 137. Screen setting – 2
It is important to select more than 256 colors. The second choice supported by your video card will besufficient (32768 colors in the above case).
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
159
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
3.5 Start–up of the Craft Terminal management software
3.5.1 Scope of the procedure
The scope of this procedure is to illustrate the start–up phases of the Personal Computer and the checksmade on the Windows System
3.5.2 Start–up of the software
In order to activate the ALCATEL product , perform the following sequence :
Start > 1320CT <version>
activating this icon, as for the example of next figure.
Figure 138. 1320CT software start–up
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
160
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
161
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
GETTING STARTED
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
162
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
163
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
4 GETTING STARTED
4.1 Scope
The aim of this chapter is to introduce the Craft Terminal working environment. The access to the system,the environment utilities and navigation ways through the system are described in detail. More detailedinformation on the NE management is given in the chapter5 on page 221.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
164
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
4.2 System access
In the following some examples are reported related to WINDOWS NT and WINDOWS 2000environment; the same rules can be applied to WINDOWS XP environment.
4.2.1 Logging into the system
This is the first operation to undertake to access the “Network Element Synthesis view” and then theEML–USM system.
The view that will greet you, called the Login panel, is presented below.
The platform uses the standard Windows User login procedures.
Enter a user name and password that is valid for this
Logon Information
User name:
OK
Password:
system
Cancel Help Shut Down...
WINDOWS NT
WINDOWS 2000
Figure 139. Login panel view (example)
To correctly access:
– Enter your login name.
N.B. You are assigned your login name by the administrator.
– Enter your password.
After a correct login, the login view is automatically replaced by the desktop view, from which you will beable to start–up the Craft Terminal management software, as presented in the following paragraph.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
165
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
4.2.2 Start–up of the Craft Terminal application
The desktop is presented to the operator.
In order to activate the ALCATEL software product the operator has to perform the following sequence:
– Click on the Start Menu on the bottom of the screen.
– Select the 1320CT shortcut (see figure below) to start the application.
Figure 140. Software start–up (example)
This view is automatically replaced by the Network Element Synthesis view, from which you will be ableto access the Craft Terminal management in particular the EML–USM functionalities for the NEmanagement.
The Network Element Synthesis view presented to the operator is described at chapter 4.3 on page 171.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
166
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
4.2.3 Password modification
4.2.3.1 Password Characteristics
Your password must be sufficiently complex to prevent it from being guessed by other users, for securitypurpose. It may contain letters, characters and numbers, in upper case or lower case character form.
For obvious security reasons, the password is not printed on the screen when you type it in.
4.2.3.2 Modification procedure
The platform uses the standard Windows User Password Modification available via Task Managerinterface. Follow this procedure:
– press keys <Ctrl> + <Alt> + <Del> simultaneously; the system displays the Windows Security userdialog. It displays some logon information and some functional buttons as shown in the figure below.
WINDOWS NT
WINDOWS 2000
Figure 141. Windows Security (example)
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
167
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
– Press the C key or click on the Change Password... button. The system displays the WindowsChange Password User dialog (see the following shell), in which the following steps will have to beaccomplished.
WINDOWS NT
WINDOWS 2000
Figure 142. Password modification procedure (example)
– Enter the old password in the Old field.
– Enter the new password in the New field.
– Confirm the new password by re–entering it in the Confirm field.
– Click on the Ok push button to validate the new password.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
168
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
4.2.4 Locking the screen
This utility enables to lock the screen to prevent other users from using your working environment. Twoways of doing this are described below.
The platform uses the standard Windows Lock Screen available via Task Manager interface pressing thekeys <Ctrl> + <Alt> + <Del> simultaneously. The system will display the native Windows Security userdialog (see the same Figure 141. on page 166). It displays some logon information and some functionalbuttons. Follow the steps:
– Windows NT: press the W key or click on the Lock Workstation push button to activate the LockScreen modality;Windows 2000: press the K key or click on the Lock Computer push button to activate the LockScreen modality;Windows XP: press the K key or click on the Lock Computer push button to activate the Lock Screenmodality;
– The system displays a user warning dialog to inform the user about the locked state: only this user(or the administrator) can unlock the workstation;
– To return, press <Ctrl> + <Alt> + <Del> simultaneously again;
– The system presents the Unlock Workstation/Computer user dialog: the user must insert hispassword to unlock the workstation (as in the login procedure).
To resume work, type in your password in the Password: entry box.
Figure 143. Unlock the workstation WINDOWS NT
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
169
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
Figure 144. Unlock the computer with WINDOWS 2000
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
170
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
4.2.5 Logging out from the system
Logging out from the Craft Terminal will automatically quit all the applications opened.
There are two ways to logout from the Craft Terminal :
– Using the Start > Shut Down shortcut and selecting in the confirmation dialog box.
– Using the Windows Task Manager, pressing the keys <Ctrl> + <Alt> + <Del> simultaneously.
The system will display the Windows Security user dialog (see the same Figure 141. on page 166).It displays some logon information and some functional buttons.
Click on the Shut Down push button to logout.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
171
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
4.3 Access to the main functionalities
A more detailed description concerning the Craft Terminal main management domains (functionalities) isgiven in the Introduction manual.
Start–up the Craft Terminal software (for details see para. 4.2.2 on page 165) in the following way:
– Click on the Start Menu on the bottom of the screen.
– Select the 1320CT shortcut (see figure below) to start the application.
The following Network Element Synthesis figure is presented.
This view permits to access the Craft Terminal functionalities, as described in the following sections.
The following main management functionalities are accessed from the Network Element Synthesis:
– The EML Construction management– The Element management functionality,– Realign ISA board population– The Administration management functionality,– NE Profile management– The Alarm management functionality,– Alarms formatter
To perform these management functionalities, use is made of the different Network Element Synthesismenus. These generally opens displaying a scrolling menu with the application available.
Figure 145. Network Element Synthesis screen with plugged NE.
N.B. Depending on your access rights and on the management state, you may or may not haveaccess to some of the management functions described below. The management functions thatcannot be accessed are represented as greyed icons or greyed menu options.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
172
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
4.3.1 EML construction management
It permits to list and manage (create, delete, describe, etc) the Map/Submap/Network Element/ISA boardpopulation referred to the “topology” of the Craft Terminal.
It is managed directly from the Network Element Synthesis of Figure 145. using the option Maps tomanage maps/submaps, and using the Ne Directory menu to manage the NE.
An example of Map is shown below in Figure 146.
Details are given in the EML Construction documentation in this Handbook.
In the following is described the shortest way to connect the CT with the NE.
When starting the Network Element Synthesis, in order to simplify the operator activity, already createdstandard maps are always present, as for the example of Figure 145. :
• this map is automatically presented to the operator.
• using this map the operator can avoid to create a new one.
• when a NE is physically connected to the Craft Terminal it is automatically presented in the viewand the operator can proceed managing the equipment without creating the NE.
At this point, to enter the NE management, follow next paragraph.
Figure 146. Example of Map.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
173
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
4.3.2 Element management
It permits to carry out all the management functions for a specific NE or specific ISA board, accessing theEML–USM.
The access to these views is allowed from Network Element Synthesis view of Figure 145. as indicatedin the previous paragraph.
Select the NEs or ISA board to supervise in the Network Element Synthesis views. It is highlighted.
Select the Start option from the Supervision pull down menu as for the following figure.
Figure 147. Starting supervision from the Network Element Synthesis views.
Once the “Supervised” state is established it will be possible to select the Show Equipment option fromthe Supervision pull down menu as shown in Figure 148. below.
Figure 148. Login a NE.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
174
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
Figure 149. Login and Password dialog box
In the Login Dialog box (Figure 149. ), type your Login and Password; i is possible to set the “Rememberpassword” option by adding a tick in the relevant square
The NE or ISA board is entered and the EML–USM will display the NE/ISA board first management view,as shown in the examples of Figure 150. (if a NE has been selected) and Figure 151. (if a ISA board hasbeen selected).
Navigation is discussed in chapter 4.5 at page 196.
Details are given in the Craft Terminal Operator’s Handbook dedicated to the specific NE or ISA board.
Figure 150. Network Element view (example)
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
175
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
Figure 151. ISA board management view (example)
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
176
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
4.3.3 ISA board population
This menu is available only if the ISA board software has been previously installed on the PersonalComputer; on the contrary it will be greyed. For information about ISA board Software installation referto the relevant Operator’s Handbook.
The task of this menu is to display the ISA board associated to a Network Element.
Select the NE which is equipped with ISA board and then the NE Directory –> Realigned ISA boardPopulation (refer to Figure 152. ); after few seconds the ISA boards will be display (refer to the exampleof Figure 153. ).
Figure 152. Realign ISA board population
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
177
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
Figure 153. ISA boards
To access the ISA boards management view it is necessary to Start the Supervision and Login menu asexplained in paragraph 4.3.2
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
178
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
4.3.4 Administration management
N.B. This management function is reserved to the Craft Terminal System Administrator.
The Network Element Synthesis menu options are used to obtain Administration management functionslike Software Administration and MIB copies.
4.3.5 NE Profile management
This menu allows to define the profile operator in order to access to all the Craft Terminal functionality(ADMIN) or only a part of it ( Viewer).
Select Supervision–>NE Profile Management; the following Figure 154.
Figure 154. Login and Password dialog box
Type the Login name and Password ; Figure 155. will be opened
OPERATOR operator
Figure 155. NE User Management window
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
179
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
Click on New user button to define a new user profile; Figure 156. will be opened.
Figure 156. Create new User in this NE
The following fields are available:
– User Name: it is the name of the operator
– Operator: five types of operators are define with different NE access rights as follow
• admin: all functionality except cross–connection deletion if created by RM
• Administrator: all functionality except cross–connection deletion if created by RM
• Constructor: all functionality except selection of manager assignment (SY manager, RM, etc)
• Operator: all functionality except selection of manager assignment (SY manager, RM, etc)
• Viewer: no modification are allowed
– Password
– Confirm Password
An example is showed in Figure 157.
Figure 157. Example of new user creation
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
180
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
Click OK to confirm
To remove a user , first select the relevant row, then press on Remove User button; a confirmation dialogbox appear (see Figure 158. )
Figure 158. Remove user
Click on OK button to remove the user or Cancel to Exit without modification.
To change password first select the relevant row corresponding to a user then press on ChangePassword button.
A new window will be opened (see Figure 159. )
Figure 159. Change password
Type the Old password, the New password and Confirm the new password, than click on OK button.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
181
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
4.3.6 Alarm management
4.3.6.1 Alarm Surveillance
It allows to navigate to the alarm subsystem to obtain complete information about alarms of the NEs undersupervision present in the Map.
From the Network Element Synthesis click on Alarm Surveillance option of the Supervision pull downmenu (Figure 160. ).
Figure 160. Alarm Surveillance option menu
The following view is opened from which operations on alarms can be carried out.
Figure 161. Alarm Management view.
Details are given in the “AS Operator’s Handbook”.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
182
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
4.3.6.2 Show NE Alarms
It allows to navigate to the alarms subsystem to obtain complete information about the selected NE alarmsunder supervision.
From the Network Element Synthesis click on Show NE Alarms option of the Supervision pull downmenu (Figure 162. ).
Figure 162. Show NE alarms option
The following view is opened from which operations on alarms can be carried out.
Figure 163. Alarms sublist
All the alarms displayed in the “AS current USM: Alarm Sublist: NE Alarms: ADM.........” can be exportedgenerating a file as explained in the 1330AS OPERATOR’S HANDBOOK. The output file generated canbe read as explained in the paragraph 4.3.6.3 on page 183.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
183
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
4.3.6.3 Alarms Formatter
This option allows to translate in a readable form the output file generated by Alarm Surveillance (AS)application as generally described in previously paragraph 4.3.6.2 on page 182.
Select the Extras –> Alarms Formatter as shown in Figure 164.
Figure 164. Alarm formatter
Figure 165. will be opened; select the input file generated in the AS application (ascurusm_export:txt inthe example of Figure 165. ) and then click on Format File.
Figure 165. Choose AS input file to format view
The operator can read the file as above formatted using a word processor like Notepad or similar viewer.To do so, first point to the file in the directory D:\ALCATEL\CT–K xx.yy.zz\EXPORT like in the exampleof Figure 166. an then open with Notepad or similar word processor; Figure 167. will be opened
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
184
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
Figure 166. Alarms formatter output directory
Figure 167. Formatted alarms view.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
185
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
4.3.7 Quitting the Craft Terminal applications
To close the Craft Terminal applications select Exit from the Maps menu or select the “X” options fromthe title bar of the view.
A confirmation dialogue box opens (as for the following figure) from which you can confirm or cancel the”Exit” operation using the Yes or No push button.
Figure 168. Quitting the Craft Terminal application
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
186
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
4.4 Views description
In the Craft Terminal management there are two principal types of views: the Network Element Synthesisand the Equipment EML–USM.
4.4.1 Network Element Synthesis view description
This is the first view presented to the operator. It is the entry point of all the activities.In the Info Model Craft Terminal Platform the NEs application represents each NE as a tree node (withoverall alarm synthesis and fundamental NE information) expandable to get more details.No graphic maps are provided.
It is mainly used for EML Construction management (Network topology) and to access the NetworkElement views for the Craft Terminal management. The example below shows the screen organization.
Menus options
Maps / Submaps / NE Details of item selected in left side
Extras
Figure 169. First view: Network Element Synthesis view.
On the left side of the desktop are inserted Maps/Submaps/Network Element/Network Termination (SlaveNE) which can be selected, created, etc.On the right side are listed detailed information, property and description of the field selected in the leftside.On the top side are indicated all the menus, the selection of which makes available the relevant options.
To obtain more information on this view, refer to the section EML Construction.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
187
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
4.4.2 Equipment views description
There are three types of equipment views. The NE view, the board view and the port view.
4.4.2.1 NE (Network Element) view
The front side of a NE may be composed of several racks, with several subracks in each of them. Eachsubrack is composed of several slots where are inserted boards.
Consequently, the number of views related to a NE are: Equipment (several racks), Rack, Subrack.Because several types of equipment are made of only one subrack, some views could have the samecontents when this equipment is displayed.
An example of NE view is given in following Figure 170.
This view shows a NE subrack, in which the different boards are represented.
The NE view (see following Figure 170. ) contains a Severity alarm synthesis, a View title, a Domain alarmsynthesis, a management status control panel and a message area. They provide you with informationneeded to manage the network.
A Menu bar and the View area contained in the same NE view permit to perform all the configurations anddisplay the specific selected item.
Boards may be duplicated in a NE for equipment protection reasons, to avoid loss of communications incase of equipment failure.
Some boards contain several ports used for transmission purposes and interconnections between thedifferent boards.
The lock representation which appears over some boards, indicates that these boards are “In Service”.
To be able to remove one of these boards, firstly you must put the board “Out of Service”, thende–implement the function involved in the relevant board (i.e.: cross connection, equipment protection,synchronization, multiplex section protection, port assigned) and finally remove it.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
188
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
Severity alarmssynthesis
Message/state area
View area
View title
Domain alarm synthesis
Management states control panel
Menu bar
Icons representingthe board state
Icon representing the globalboard alarm severity
Figure 170. NE view.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
189
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
a ) The Severity Alarm Synthesis
The Craft Terminal provides an alarm functionality that informs the operator on the severity of thedifferent alarms in the NE as well as on the number of current alarms. There are five different alarmseverity levels. In the Craft Terminal these different levels are associated with colors (green in normalcondition).
• Red: Critical alarm (CRI).• Orange: Major alarm (MAJ).• Yellow: Minor alarm (MIN).• Cyan: Warning alarm (WNG).• White: Indeterminate (IND). Not operative.
Each alarm severity is represented by an alarm icon situated in the top left hand corner of the view.These alarm icons are constantly represented on the different Equipment views (NE view, Board viewor Port view) so that the operator is always aware of the alarms occurring in the system.
Furthermore the shape of the alarm icons in the alarm panel gives an indication of alarm occurrence.The figures which follow describe the different examples.An alarm icon with a circle inside it (and a number at the bottom of the icon) indicates that alarmsof the number and the type defined by the icon are occurring.An alarm icon with a rectangle inside indicates that no alarms of the type defined by the icon areoccurring.An alarm icon greyed out indicates that a spontaneous incoming alarm notification has been inhibited.
Circular shaped alarm iconindicating alarm occurrence.
Rectangular shaped icon in-dicating a stable state.
Greyed icon indicating alarmnotification inhibition.
Figure 171. Control panel alarm icon shapes.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
190
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
b ) The Domain Alarm Synthesis
The Craft Terminal provides an alarm functionality that informs the operator on the domain of thedifferent alarms in the NE as well as on the number of current alarms. There are different alarmdomain types according to the different domains in which the NE can be subdivided (example:Transmission, Equipment, etc). Refer to the Operator’s Handbook of the specific NE for the list.In the Craft Terminal these different types are green colored in normal condition, otherwise the colorcorresponds to the highest severity among the set of active alarms for the relevant domain, accordingto the same color rules of previous point a ).
c ) The Management States Control Panel
The different management states concerning the NE are also represented via icons located in thetop right corner of the equipment views. These icons are:
Mnemonic Description Maintenance
SUP Supervision state
GREEN: NE is under supervision.
BROWN: NE is not under supervision.
Used in the OS.
ALI Alignment state
GREEN: configuration is aligned (is equal betweenEML manager and NE MIB).
ORANGE: configuration is not aligned (is not equalbetween EML manager and NE MIB).
Local Access State
GREEN: Indicates that the Craft Terminal has the OSpermission to manage the NE (granted).
CYAN: Indicates that the Craft Terminal has not theOS permission to manage the NE (denied).
COM NE unreachable/unreachable
GREEN: Identifies the “Enable” operational state ofthe connection between NE and Craft Terminal (SDHservice link up)
RED: Identifies the “Disable” operational state of theconnection between NE and Craft Terminal (SDH ser-vice link down)
OS Operational System Isolation
GREEN: Indicates that the N.E. is not managed by the1353SHCYAN: Indicates that the N.E. is managed by the1353SH.
MGR Manager level
GREEN: Indicates that the N.E. is not managed bythe 1354RM
CYAN: Indicates that the N.E. is not managed by the1354RM
NTP Network Time Protocol
GREEN: NTP protocol enabled and both NTP servers(main and spare) are unreachable.
BROWN: NTP protocol disabled.
CYAN: NTP protocol enabled and at least one NTPservers (main or spare) are reachable.
AC Abnormal Condition
GREEN: normal operating condition.
CYAN: detection of an ABNORMAL operative condi-tion. Type: active loopbacks, forcing the unit into ser-vice, laser forced ON or OFF, try to restore after ALS
N.B. Position the cursor over one of the states icons, to display in the message area (seeFigure 172. ) the management state corresponding to the color displayed by this icon.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
191
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
A color is applied to each management state icon. They give an indication of the status of the NE.Green is normal status.
N.B. As for the alarm icons, a rectangular management state icon represents the stable statewhile a circular icon shape represents an unstable management state.
d ) The View Title area
This area contains the title of the view that is currently displayed in the “View Area”.
e ) The Message area
The information displayed in the message area depends on the mouse cursor location within theview. It can give two main types of information:
• Information on the contents of the view, i.e. board name, port name etc... This informationdepends on the type of view (NE view, Board view or Port view).
• Information on the control panel. Displays the visual information provided by the icons in awritten form.
In the following figure the mouse cursor is situated on slot 6. The message area therefore indicateswhich board is present in slot 6.
f ) The Menu Bar
The menu bar allows to access all the menu options, performing all the configuration and supervisionfunctions of the Network Element.
g ) The View Area
The view area is the region of the window where the graphical representation of the specific view isdisplayed.
h ) Icon representing the board state
On the board are present icons representing the “In service/out of service/faulty” board state andthe EPS (Equipment Protection Switching) board state; the possible state are reported in Table 5.
Table 5. Board state icon
BOARD SERVICE STATE
Unit out of service
Unit faulty
EPS BOARD STATE
Unit in stand–by
No RequestDo not Revert
Lockout
Auto Switch (WTR, Fail)ManualForced
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
192
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
Message area
Figure 172. Example of the contents of the message area.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
193
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
4.4.2.2 Board view
Each board that appears in the NE view has a particular detailed view. To avoid representing all the views,only the general layout is described in this section with an example.It is shown in the following figure.
N.B. The various Alarm Synthesis, State Control Panel and the Message Area are identical to thosein the NE view and are no more described in this section.
BoardAdministrative State
Porticons
Indications on the probable causes of thealarms occurring in the board.
Figure 173. Example of a NE Board view.
The board views show:
– The icon representations of the ports. There are as many icons as there are different ports. In theabove figure one type of ports is represented: a PDH port view.
– The Board Administrative state information area that indicates the “In/Out of service” state of theboard .
– An Alarm probable causes information area which permits to determine the probable cause of thealarms occurring in the board.This alarm probable causes information area uses the alarm severity color definition describedpreviously to indicate the severity of the alarms occurring.
– Small alarm icons on a corner of the port icons that indicate the most critical alarm occurring in theport. To get details on the alarms occurring in the ports, navigate to the port view.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
194
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
4.4.2.3 Port view
Navigation to the port views is explained in chapter 4.5.2 on page 199.
The port view is the last view of the NE and shows in detail the composition of the ports, in terms of theTPs composing them and relevant alarms.
To avoid representing all the different port views, only an example is used to underline the descriptionsgiven hereinafter.
The port view is represented in the following figure.
N.B. The various Alarm Synthesis, State Control Panel and the Message Area are identical to thosein the NE view and are not described again in this section.
Functional blocks of the boardconcerning this particular port
Port and board identification
Figure 174. Example of a detailed port view.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
195
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
The port views show:
– The signal processing functional blocks concerning the port.These functional blocks are placed on the top of the view. The acronyms situated on each functionalblock identifies the specific operations of the functional block.
– A port functional state information message area.This message area gives information on the Protection state and the Laser shutdown state of theport.The information in the functional state message area may change from port to port. For example,electrical ports do not have the Laser shutdown information.
– Small alarm icons placed in the functional blocks, indicate alarm occurrence. These alarm icons areidentified by acronyms indicating the probable cause of the alarm.These alarm icons use the alarm severity color feature to indicate the severity of the alarm. Theoperator can therefore determine the type and severity of the alarm occurring in a specific part of theport.
– A cross (x) beneath the “signal processing functional blocks” indicates that the condition of theresource is cross-connected.
– A P beneath the “signal processing functional blocks” indicates that the resource is underperformance monitoring
– A L beneath o the left side “signal processing functional blocks” indicates that the resource is underloop operational state.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
196
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
4.5 Navigation
This section describes the NE navigation principles. The different operations that can be done to navigatethrough the different views are explained. They can be accomplished via menu options, push buttons orby double clicking.
4.5.1 Network Element Synthesis (Network Topology) views
It is possible to open the view related to a NE symbol contained in the Network Element Synthesis view.This permits to get a detailed view of the NE (as in Figure 150. on page 174).It is also possible to access the Alarm management views domain.
4.5.1.1 Navigating from the Network Element Synthesis
From the NEs synthesis main area select a NE and from the Supervision pull down menu select the Startoption.Then select the option Show Equipment in the same Supervision menu.Type the Login Name and Password then the Craft Terminal will display the specific NE main managementview as shown in Figure 150. on page 174.
Figure 175. Start the Supervision on a NE.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
197
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
Figure 176. Show Equipment to open the USM view.
Figure 177. Login and Password dialog box
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
198
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
4.5.1.2 Accessing the Alarm management views
From the Network Element Synthesis view select the Alarm Surveillance option from the Supervisionpull down menu.Selecting this menu option, the Alarm management view is enabled.
Figure 178. Opening the Alarm view from Network Topology views.
4.5.1.3 Exiting from the Network Element Synthesis view
Exiting from the Network Element Synthesis view (if there is no other view concerning Network topology)opened has the same result as quitting the Craft Terminal application (para.4.3.7 on page 185).To do so select the “X” options from the title bar of the view.
An Unsaved changes warning dialog box will be display from which you can Save changes (YES) or not(NO) or CANCEL the exiting procedure. If the operator select YES a confirmation dialogue box opens fromwhich you can confirm or cancel the ”Exit” operation using the Yes or No push buttons.
Figure 179. Unsaved changes warning
Figure 180. Exiting the application: confirm request
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
199
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
4.5.2 Equipment views
Equipment views are: NE views, Board views and Port views. The Network Element Synthesis view allowsto open a NE view by means of a NE login. It is then possible to navigate amongst the different equipmentviews and to access other management domains.
4.5.2.1 Navigating from the NE view
The NE view gives access to the following:– Board views,– Alarm views,– Event Log Manager views,– Previous displayed view,– Specific NE view.
a ) To open a Board view
There are two ways to open a board view from a NE view: via the Views pull down menu or by doubleclicking on the desired board.If you use the menu option, click on the board to visualize. Its outline is highlighted on the NE viewshowing that the board is selected. Select the Open Object or Open In Window option of the Viewspull down menu.
Figure 181. Opening a Board view.
The Board view is then opened (see the example of Figure 173. on page 193).
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
200
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
b ) To access the Alarm views
From the Network Element view (see Figure 170. ), select the Diagnosis pull down menu. Thenselect the desired option from the Alarms cascading menu as shown in the following figure.
Figure 182. Opening an Alarm view.
c ) To access an Event Log Manager (ELM) view
From the Network Element view (see Figure 170. ), select the Diagnosis pull down menu. Thenselect the desired option from the Log Browsing cascading menu as shown in the following figure.
Figure 183. Opening an ELM view.
For the Event Log Browsing refer to the ELB Operator’s Handbook.
d ) To recall the previous view
To recall the last view displayed, select the Backward option of the Views pull down menu (seeFigure 181. ).
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
201
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
e ) To access a specific NE view
When a NE is composed of several racks, the navigation allows to pass from a subrack view to therack supporting this subrack.
In the NE view showing a subrack, select the Show supporting equipment option of the Equipmentpull down menu as indicated in the following figure.
Figure 184. Opening a specific NE view.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
202
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
4.5.2.2 Navigating from the Board views
The Board view gives access to the following views:– NE views– Specific Port views– Alarm management views
In the Board view, the Views pull down menu is identical to that in the NE view. Therefore, you can do the samenavigation operations as the ones carried out from the NE view and they are not repeated here.However, is given the description of how to open a specific NE view and a specific port view.
a ) Opening a specific Port view
From the Board views you can access a specific Port view either using the Views pull down menuor using the Board pull down menu or by double clicking on the port representation.If you use the View menu, click on the port representation and select the Open Object or Open InWindow (see chapter 4.5.3 on page 204) option of the Views pull down menu as shown in thefollowing figure.
Figure 185. Opening a specific Port view by using the View menu.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
203
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
If you use the Board menu, click on the port representation and select the Port Access option ofthe Board pull down menu as shown in the following figure.
Figure 186. Opening a specific Port view by using the Board menu.
The Port view is then opened as indicated in the example of Figure 174. on page 194.
In this figure, the board functional blocks are identified in the upper part of the view. They describethe signal processing operations undertaken by the specified board relative to the Port view.For example, in the port view of this figure, the functional blocks concern the electrical PDH portopened from the Board view.
b ) Opening a specific NE view
To open the NE view supporting the board, select the Show supporting equipment option of theBoard pull down menu as shown in the following figure.
Figure 187. Opening a specific NE view.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
204
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
4.5.3 Open view in window
Navigating amongst different views may be performed either inside the same window, or opening a newwindow. This is useful if you want to navigate to another view without clearing the current one.
This operation can be carried out from Equipment views.
After selecting the desired element (board, port) from the current equipment view, select the Open InWindow option from the Views pull down menu as shown in the following figure.
Figure 188. Opening a view in a window
The selected view is then displayed in a new window.
N.B. A max. of five windows can be opened simultaneously.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
205
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
4.6 NE Alarms and NE Status
This section describes the types of alarms that are defined for the Craft Terminal, in terms of severity levels,and the way they are propagated through the different Equipment views (NE, Board or Port views).
4.6.1 NE Alarm
4.6.1.1 Description
Five different alarm severity levels are provided by the EML.
• Red: Critical alarm (CRI).• Orange: Major alarm (MAJ).• Yellow: Minor alarm (MIN).• Cyan: Warning alarm (WNG).• White: Indeterminate (IND). Not operative.
These levels are associated with the colors indicated. They enable to know the severity of the currentalarms occurring in the Equipment.
4.6.1.2 Propagation
In all the equipment views, small icons synthetically summarizing the alarms occurring in these differententities are represented next to the Board or Port entities themselves.
These icons have the following characteristics:
– Color: enables to determine the severity of the alarm occurring (critical, major,...) in the board or port.This functionality enables a rapid diagnosis and navigation to the views where resides the source ofthe problem.
– Aspect: inside the icon either a ”–” is drawn, in which case no alarm is occurring in the entity, or a”x” sign is drawn, in which case alarms are occurring in the entity.
Using these two characteristics (depicted in Figure 189. ) you can determine the presence of alarms inthe entities managed.
The figure below shows:
– A section of a NE view with some boards defined and the alarm icon below the board representations,– A section of a Board view with a port defined and the alarm icon next to the port representation,– A section of a Port view with the alarm icons drawn next to the subunits composing the port.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
206
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
Icon summarizing thealarms occurring at theboard level (i. e. are notindicated Transmissionalarms as LOS, AIS,LFA etc). The color ofthe icon indicates theseverity of the most criti-cal alarm occurring inthe board.
Icon summarizing thealarms occurring in theport. The color of theicon indicates the sever-ity of the most criticalalarm occurring in theport.
Icon summarizing thealarms occurring in theboard element namedMST. The color of the icon in-dicates the severity ofthe alarm.The name of the iconidentifies the alarm.
Figure 189. Alarm representation in the Equipment views.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
207
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
4.7 Utilities
Utilities are available using dedicated tools accessible in Windows environment.
For example the following operator support can be used:
– printing functionalities,
– screen and windows hardcopy functionalities,
– electronic mail functionalities,
As regards the use of the utilities refer to the Windows documentation.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
208
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
4.8 On–Line documentation
4.8.1 Overview
The Help is an important aspect of the Craft Terminal product. Using this functionality you can getinformation on actions you are carrying out or on any particular topic linked to the Craft Terminal.
The help is based on world wide web technologies. The topics are written in html. Netscape Gold is thebrowser used to navigate through the html pages and it is also used to edit the user personal pages.Navigation through the help is also possible using a customized navigation bar permanently displayed onthe left of the help screen (see paragraph 4.8.9 on page 217).
To know how to use Netscape, access the Netscape on–line help on the web, by typing the following URLdirectly into the location Netsite: text field of Netscape (or using the URL dialog box produced by theFile|Open Location menu item):http://home.netscape.com/eng/mozilla/3.0/handbook/index.html
Access to product help is possible in two different ways: Permanent access and access when using theCraft Terminal.
– Help permanent access:Any time you need information, you can start Netscape and access the Craft Terminal help by typingthe correct URL directly into the location Netsite: text field. It is not necessary to have a Craft Terminalproduct running, you just need Netscape and the help location URL.
N.B. To have the correct URL, ask your system administrator.
– Help access when using the Craft Terminal:The Craft Terminal enables to access the help from the help menu, using the help push buttons ofthe dialog boxes. This option gives you access to contextual help. The help menu gives access tothe following parts of the help:
Help menu in the NES view Help menu in the USM view
help About help On help
help Craft Terminal help On context
Glossary
About help
help Tutorial
The menu options detailed in the following chapters are in fact entry points to the main help system. Onceyou have entered the help system via one of these menu options, hyperlinks enable you to navigate toother parts of the help system and to view other help topics.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
209
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
4.8.2 Help About
Help About displays the version and copyright for the Craft Terminal Product (see Figure 191. ) .To access the Help About, select the Help About option from the Help pull down menu.
Figure 190. Obtaining About help.
Figure 191. About Network Element Synthesis
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
210
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
4.8.3 Help Craft Terminal
Help Craft Terminal displays the 1320CT help home page.To access the Craft Terminal help, select the Craft Terminal option from the Help pull down menu.
Figure 192. Obtaining help on Craft Terminal.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
211
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
4.8.4 Help on help
Not operative in current release.
Help on help explains how to use the help system. It helps understanding the basics of navigation and alsopresents facilities that will enable you to quickly find the requested information. Using this option opensthe current on–line documentation chapter. This help is available from any Help pull down menu option.
To access help on help, select the On Help... option from the Help pull down menu.
Figure 193. Obtaining help on help.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
212
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
4.8.5 Help on context
To access the on line context sensitive help you can either:
– Press on the F1 key placed at the top of the keyboard to get help on the active window.– Select the On Context option from the Help pull down menu to get help on the relevant application
window.– Click on the Help push button from any window.
The advantage of the help on context using push buttons is that it directly brings up the help that appliesto the actual context you are in, giving information on this action.
Figure 194. Obtaining context sensitive help.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
213
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
4.8.6 Glossary
Not operative in current release.
This help option enables you to display the Craft Terminal on–line glossary.To access the Craft Terminal Glossary, select the Glossary option from the Help pull down menu.
Figure 195. Obtaining the glossary.
A window like the following is opened.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
214
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
Figure 196. Glossary help window
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
215
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
4.8.7 About help
Not operative in current release.
About help displays the version and copyright for the Craft Terminal Product.To access the About help, select the About option from the Help pull down menu.
Figure 197. Selecting About of help.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
216
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
4.8.8 Tutorial
Tutorial displays the Craft Terminal help home page (see example of Figure 199. )To access the Tutorial help, select the Tutorial option from the Help pull down menu.
Figure 198. Obtaining help home page (Introduction)
Figure 199. Example of help tutorial
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
217
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
4.8.9 Navigation principles
To navigate the tree structure with Netscape the user can use the navigation bar permanently displayedto the left of the screen.
Figure 200. Navigation bar
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
218
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
The user can click at anytime on:
– Home, to go to the home page which describes the overall documentation and offers links to eachmanual
– Contents displays the content of the manual being consulted.
– Previous and Next are used to navigate within a chapter. Therefore, Navigation occurs by level 2 titles.
– Glossary allows for direct access to the glossary.
– Help provides on–line help for the navigator and the navigation bar. Displays the current help chapter.
– What’s New displays a version history list. This is in fact the list of New components contained inthe InterLeaf documentation on the same page.
– User Pages give access to users space. This facilitates user’s notes or comments.
The User Pages are created automatically on Craft Terminal user account creation. They are accessibleonly to a Craft Terminal user.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
219
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
EML CONSTRUCTION
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
220
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
221
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
5 EML CONSTRUCTION
5.1 Scope
The aim of this document is to describe the functions permitted by the “Network Element Synthesis” view.These operations are mainly related to:
– the management of Maps, Submaps and Network Element (creation, deletion, saving, opening, etc):the navigation through the necessary sequences will be described.
– the supervision and login of the Network Element and ISA boards
– the alarm surveillance
– the NE address management
– the Administrative management
– the log access and Craft Terminal process management
Sufficient details on the addition, the removal and the selection of Network Element are given to enablean easy characterization of the network.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
222
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
5.2 Generalities on the network element synthesis
5.2.1 Presentation
This platform (see Figure 201. on page 225) permits the operator to access the NE Craft Terminalfunctions.
On the top of the screen one menu bar and one Tabbed pane permit to enter the various managementfunctions.
The items of the menu bar are:
• Maps: for Maps/Submaps creation, opening and managing.
• Supervision: to access the NE and the alarm surveillance.
• Ne directory: for NE creation, removing and browsing the NE property.
• NE Address: to manage the NE address.
• CT Environment: to list processes and software.
• Extras: to format the alarms in a readable and printable form.
The items of the tabbed pane are:
• Maps: to show and access the Maps/Submaps/NE in the view area of the screen.A led symbol inside informs of a new event in the maps.
• Activity log: to access the activity log list. Typically for Alcatel personnel use
The other part of the screen is dedicated to the view area subdivided in two parts:
– Left side: lists the Maps/Submaps/NE created.
– Right side: lists details (property) of the selected NE (NE type, address, status, etc).The “view area” is described at para. 5.3.3 on page 248.
The option of each item of the menu bar is then shortly presented and is indicated the paragraph whereit is detailed.The flow chart of Figure 203. on page 227 summarizes the menu option.Details and operative information are given from paragraph 2.2 on. They are not presented according tothe menu option sequence but according to the operative sequence.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
223
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
– Maps
• New: to create new “Map” and “Submap”. See para 5.3.1.1 on page 232 .
• Open: to open available maps. See para 5.3.2.1 on page 243.
• Save: to save a created map. See para 5.3.2.2 on page 244.
• Save as: to save a created map with a new name. See para 5.3.2.2 on page 244.
– Private: only the operator which saves can manage it.– Public: all the operators can manage it.
• Rename: to change Maps/Submaps/NE name. See Figure 209. on page 233 and relevantdescription.
• Description: to insert details on Maps/Submaps/NE. See Figure 211. on page 234 and relevantdescription.
• Delete: to delete map and submaps. See para 5.3.2.3 on page 245.
• Exit: to exit from the Network Element Synthesis application
– Supervision
• Start: enables the supervision of Map, Submaps ,single NE or ISA boards. See para 5.4.2.1 onpage 258.
• Stop: disables the supervision of Map, Submaps ,single NE or ISA boards. See para 5.4.2.2 onpage 259.
• Show Equipment: opens USM, by entering the NE views, it permits to manage the selectedequipment/ISA board. See para 5.4.3 on page 260.
• Show NE alarms: It allows to navigate to the alarms subsystem to obtain complete informationabout the selected NE alarms under supervision.
• Profile management: shows the administrative profile of the selected NE. Not operative.
• File Administration: permits the following administrative management:– SWP Administrator: to install Network Element Software Package on the CT.
The installed Software Package can be subsequently downloaded on the NE with the USMmenu options for release upgrading, following the equipment evolution. See para 5.6.1 onpage 278.
– Mib Copies: to import / export files containing the configuration data of the NE. See para5.6.2 on page 285.• Load from disk: import file.• Save to disk: export file.
• Alarm Surveillance: enters the alarms counter summary of all the NE under supervision. Seepara 5.4.5 on page 264.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
224
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
– NE Directory
• NE properties: to change the NE address in the Network Element Synthesis map, when the NEis not being supervised. See para 5.3.2.4 on page 246.
• Create Q3 NE: for Network Element creation. See para 5.3.1.2 on page 235.
• Create SNMP NE: for SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) Network Elementcreation. See para 5.3.1.3 on page 241.
• Create Slave NE: for Slave Network Element creation. Applicable to the 1540PO Info ModelNetwork Element. See para 5.8.1 on page 315.
• Delete Slave NE: for Slave Network Element deleting. Applicable to the 1540PO Info Model.Network Element. See para 5.8.2 on page 319.
• Remove NE: for Network Element removing. See para 5.3.2.5 on page 247.
• Realigned ISA board population: displays the ISA board associated to a Network Element.
– NE Address
• Settings: to change NE address inside the NE. See para 5.4.4 on page 262.
– CT Environment
• Process Control: lists the NE process. Only for Alcatel personnel use. See para 5.5.1 on page265.
• List Software: lists the Network element software platform and software management presenton the Craft Terminal for the NE. See para 5.5.2 on page 267.
• Backup: saves the data configured in the Network Element Synthesis view (mainly the createdmaps) towards files in the directories of the PC disks. See para 5.5.3 on page 269.
• Restore: restores in the Network Element Synthesis view configuration data previously savedin a files in the directories of the PC disks. See para 5.5.4 on page 271.
• ANTP Configurator: permits to manage the Network Time Protocol for the Craft Terminal:
– ANTP Server Address automatic management– Shortcut to ANTP Settings
– Extras
• Alarm Formatter: allows to translate in a readable form the output file generated by AlarmSurveillance (AS) application (refer to para. 4.3.6.3 on page 183 for details)
Further left border led symbols are shown on the left line of the screen. Their use is described at para.5.3.3.5 on page 253.
On the bottom right of the screen a triangle symbol informs on the status of the link:
• when NEs are not linked, a cross is present on the triangle• when NEs are linked, the triangle is rotating
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
225
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
Tabbed pane
Menu bar
View area: Maps/Submaps/NE
Left borderLED symbols
View area: properties of the selected itemStatus of the link
Figure 201. Network Element Synthesis screen organization.
5.2.2 Use of the platform in the network
In the Network Element Synthesis the NEs application represents each NE as a tree node expandable toget more details. No graphic maps are provided.The tree structure is based on one or more “Map” nodes which can contain “Submaps” and then NetworkElements.This structure is mainly useful when the Craft Terminal physically connected to one NE, must manageseveral NEs in a Remote mode. The tree structure permits to follow the network topology.
If only one NE is managed, a network with it only can be created.
In this way, by saving several structures of this type, the operators can manage different network or partsof networks, simply opening the useful file, according to the administration policy and in relation with accessrights.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
226
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
5.2.3 General rules using the platform
The options inside the platform screen can be selected in two ways, i.e.:
– Inside the pull down menu at the top of the Network Element Synthesis screen (menu bar),presented on para. 5.2.1 on page 222.
– Selecting the object to manage (example a NE) and showing the pop–up menu with the custommouse button. All the options available for the object are listed (see example of Figure 202. )
The operation described in this manual refer to the pull down menu bar selections.
N.B. Depending on your access rights and on the management state, you may or may not haveaccess to some management functions described in the following. The management functionsthat cannot be accessed are greyed in the pull down menu. Positioning the cursor on the greyedmenu option after a while a short message is presented to explain why the function is notaccessible.
Figure 202. Selecting with pop–up menu
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
227
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ËËËËËËËËËË
Maps
New
Open
Save
Save as
Rename
Description
Delete
Exit
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
Private
Public
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
Map
Submap
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
Map
Submap
Figure 203. Menu options flow chart (part1)
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
228
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ËËËËËËËËËËËË
Supervision
Start
Show Equipment
File
Profiles
Alarm
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
SWPAdministrator
Mib Copies
Stop
management
Surveillance
Administration
ÇÇÇÇÇÇLoad from disk
ÇÇÇÇÇÇSave to disk
Show NE Alarms
Figure 204. Menu options flow chart (part2)
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
229
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ËËËËËËËËËËËËËËË ËËËËËË
ËËËËËË
NE Directory
NE addresses
NE properties
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
Create Q3 NE
Remove NE
Settings
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇCreate Slave NE
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
Delete Slave NE
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
Create SNMP NE
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
Realign ISA board population
Figure 205. Menu options flow chart (part3)
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
230
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ËËËËËËËËËËËËËËËËËËËËË
CT Environment
Process Control
List Software
Backup
Restore
ANTP
ËËËËËËËËËËËËËËËËËË
Extras
Alarm Formatter
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ANTP Server Addressautomatic Management
Shortcut to ANTP Settings
Figure 206. Menu options flow chart (part4)
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
231
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
5.3 Managing the network topology
The aim of this chapter is to introduce the steps necessary to define and manage the network topology.This is done step by step, so that the most detailed description is given.
When starting the Network Element Synthesis, in order to simplify the operator activity, remember that:
• Already created standard maps are always present.Using these maps the operator can avoid to create a new one.
• When a NE is physically connected to the Craft Terminal it is automatically presented in the view.
A simplified operator access has been presented in the previous Getting Started manual.
Symbols present on the screen define the management state of Maps, Submaps and NE and areexplained in para. 5.4.1 on page 256.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
232
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
5.3.1 Creating the Network Topology
5.3.1.1 Creating a new Map
It may be necessary to create a new Map in order to manage a new network or to represent an existingnetwork in a different mode.
To create a new Map follow next steps.
5.3.1.1.1 Create a map
• Select the New option, then Map option from the Maps pull down menu (see Figure 207. )A first row with the “Map <unnamed>” indication is presented in the view area.
Figure 207. Creating a new Map.
• Select the “Map <unnamed>” in the view area clicking on it.Selection is indicated with a border line around the selected item, as for Figure 208.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
233
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
Figure 208. Selecting the Map <unnamed>
• define the Map name choosing the Rename option from the Maps pull down menu(Figure 209. ) and writing in the presented entry box (Figure 210. ).
Figure 209. Selecting Rename
Figure 210. Renaming the map
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
234
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
• with the Description option on the same Maps pull down menu it is possible to insert moredetails to comment the map (in the presented entry box of the example of Figure 211. ).
Figure 211. Insert a description for the map
N.B. Rename and Description options are also used for NE.
5.3.1.1.2 Create Submaps inside the Map.
For this purpose repeat the same instruction previously given for the Network, but select the Newoption, then Submap option from the Maps pull down menu of Figure 207.
The scope of the Submaps is to subdivide the Map according to customer requirement, as ageographical or functional example.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
235
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
5.3.1.2 Create Q3 Network Elements
The NE creation procedure depends on the connections condition.
– NE physically connected to the Craft Terminal
• the NE is recognized from the Craft Terminal and automatically presented in the view area asin Figure 212. If the same NE was already created in one only saved map, this last map will be automaticallyopened.If the same NE has already been created in several saved maps, one of these or a new one willbe selected.If the”new” Map option is open, the plugged NE is presented in the view.
Figure 212. Plugged NE in a map of the view area (Q3 NE example)
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
236
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
– NE physically not connected to the Craft Terminal (Remote Equipment)
• select a Map or Submap.• select the Create NE option from the NE Directory pull down menu (see Figure 213. )
Figure 213. Creating a Q3 NE
• The “Input Presentation Address” dialog box ( Figure 214. ) is presented, where the NE OSIaddress must be declared.
• Insert the address of the NE as for para 5.3.1.2.1 on page 239 (see Figure 215. as example)• Confirm the selections made by clicking on the OK push button or Cancel them.
Figure 214. NE Address
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
237
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
Figure 215. Example of NE Address
• A “box” indication is presented in the left side of the view area (see Figure 216. ) with a questionmark inside.
On the right side of the view area, for the selected NE, is listed the relevant information:description, NE type, address, status alarm synthesis etc. Some of these fields are empty orabsent and will be showed when the NE will be Supervised.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
238
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
Extras
Figure 216. Q3 NE created in a map of the view area
All the NEs can be inserted following the examples.
For each NE the Rename and Description options can also be used.
Save the map as for para. 5.3.2.2 on page 244.
A new map can also be created starting from an existing one, opening and modifying it and saving it witha new name.
Furthermore, a map can also be “restored” from a disk as cited in para. 5.5.4 on page 271 .
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
239
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
5.3.1.2.1 Q3 NE Address
The NE Address is defined in the “Input Presentation Address” dialog box ( Figure 214. on page 236),allowing to write the NEs address inside the Synthesis platform. The Craft Terminal will be able torecognize the Network Elements.
The first time the above cited dialogue box is opened (i.e. before any address has been supplied for thisNE), the Free Format AFI is presented and the various entry boxes are empty.
The same NE address declaration feature can also be used to change the NE address later on. Howeverthe NE address can only be changed if the NE is not being supervised. In spite of this, it can always bedisplayed regardless of the supervision state.
The same NE address can also be used to change the address inside the NE.
The NSAP address (Network Service Access Point) of the NE is composed of the “Area Address“ and“System ID”.
The NSAP address refers to level 3 (Network layer) of stack OSI and its structure complies with the GOSIPV2, LOCAL or ISO_DCC format.Free Format can also be selected by the operator.GOSIP V2, LOCAL, ISO_DCC and Free Format are selected in the AFI field.
– The AREA Address is composed of the following fields present in the dialog box:
• AFI : Authority and Format Identifier (2–digit)• IDI : Initial Domain Identifier (identifies the Nation) (4–digit)• VER : indicates the format of the following fields (2–digit)• AUTH : identifies the department (6–digit)• RES : reserved field (4–digit)• DOM & Area Address: free fields for defining the network levels (4–digit each one)
For the GOSIP V2 format
• select the AFI value 47• other fields : depend on networking addressing scheme
For the ISO_DCC format
• select the AFI value 39• other fields : depend on networking addressing scheme
For the LOCAL format
• select the AFI value 49• the other fields cannot be set in the previous list. The operator can decide the structure in the
Free format field (from 16 to 40 characters).
For the Free format
• select the AFI value “Free format”• the other fields cannot be set in the previous list. The operator can decide the structure in the
Free format field.
– The “Free” format field obviously is not available selecting GOSIP V2 (47) and ISO_DCC (39) in theAFI field. It is used as an alternative to the previous address fields permitting to insert a free numberof digits.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
240
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
– The value of the SYSTEM ID field (12–digit long) might be:
• the equipment MAC Ethernet address supplied by ALCATEL (level 2 of the OSI stack)
• choosed by the operator
The NSAP address (Area addresses and system ID) length can range from 16 � digit � 40.
– The value of the NSAP SELECTOR field (2–digit long) is fixed (value 1D); it is not available in the“Free Format”.
– The Fields:
• Transport Selector
• Session Selector
• Presentation Selector
must be set according to the value declared for the relevant NE (see the Operator’s handbookdedicated to the NE). At any rate, for the Alcatel Q3 NE the values are, respectively, 00, 00 and 0002.
Confirm the selections made by clicking on the OK push button or Cancel them.
– The Description Field shows the name given by the user to the NE
The restore selection does not take the new data inserted into account, showing the previous data withoutleaving the present screen.
An example of address with LOCAL format is showed in Figure 214. on page 236.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
241
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
5.3.1.3 Create SNMP NE
• select a Map or Submap.• select the Create SNMP NE option from the NE Directory pull down menu (see Figure 217. )
Figure 217. SNMP Network Element creation
• The “NE Address Settings” dialog box (Figure 218. ) is presented, where the SNMP NEaddress must be declared.
• Insert the address of the NE as indicated in the example of Figure 219. • Confirm the selections made by clicking on the OK push button or Cancel them.
At the end of the procedure the SNMP NE icon will be displayed in the NES window; it is now possibleto start the NE supervision and Login with the same rules explained in paragraph 5.4.2 on page 258 and5.4.3 on page 260.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
242
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
Figure 218. NE Address setting (empty)
Figure 219. Example of NE address setting
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
243
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
5.3.2 Maps/submaps/NE Management
In this chapter are described the general operations that can be carried out by the operator on maps:
– Opening a Map– Saving a Map– Deleting a Map/Submaps– Displaying and changing NE address– Removing NE
5.3.2.1 Opening a map
It is necessary to open a Map in order to display a network to manage or to modify an existing network.To open a Map select the Open option from the Maps pull down menu (see Figure 220. )
Figure 220. Open a Map
Select the Map to open from the list presented to the operator in a dialog box (see Figure 221. )The opened map is shown in the “view area” of the screen presenting all the contained Map/Submaps/NE.One map at a time is opened; select the map, if needed put a tick on the “Include maps containig NEs withunsupported type–release” and then click on the Ok button. In this view it is also possible to Set a selectedmap like default map by clicking on the relevant botton.
Figure 221. Select a Map
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
244
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
5.3.2.2 Saving a map
To save a Map select the Save or Save as option from the Maps pull down menu (see followingFigure 222. ).With the Save as option the name of the map can be inserted by the operator in the next opened entrybox.The Map is then saved under the new name but the two Maps (if starting from an existing one) will existin the List of maps.The advantage is that Maps can be modified without changing the original configuration currently in use.The Save as option contains other two options:
• Private: only the operator who performs the saving can manage it• Public: all the operators can manage it
Figure 222. Save a Map
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
245
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
5.3.2.3 Deleting a map/submap
To delete a Submap select the submap clicking on it, then select the Delete option from the Maps pulldown menu (see following Figure 223. ).A warning dialogue box opens informing the operator of the danger of submap deleting. Confirm or cancelthe delete map operation using the OK or Cancel push buttons.
Figure 223. Delete a Submap
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
246
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
5.3.2.4 Displaying and changing the NE address in the Network Element Synthesis view
Sometimes the NE address of a given equipment has to be changed, for instance when moving theequipment.
For that purpose, the NE Property option of the NE Directory menu should be selected (see Figure 224. ).
The same NE address dialogue box of para 5.3.1.2.1 on page 239 is presented, allowing to change theaddressing information, with the same rules presented in the paragraph (see Figure 225. )
N.B. The NE address of an equipment can only be changed if the NE is not supervised ( state).
Nevertheless it can always be displayed.
Figure 224. Display and change NE address
Figure 225. Change NE Address settings
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
247
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
5.3.2.5 Removing NEs from the topology in the Network Element Synthesis view
This operation is allowed when the NE is not supervised.
On a Map, click on a NE symbol associated with the NE object to remove it from the Network ElementSynthesis view.
Select the Remove NE option from the NE Directory pull down menu as shown in the following figure.
Figure 226. Removing a NE from the Network Element Synthesis
A dialogue box appears to confirm the choice. Click on the OK button to confirm the operation.The NE will disappear from the map.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
248
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
5.3.3 Network Element Synthesis “View Area” managing
This chapter describes the general operations that the operator may achieve on the view area of theNetwork Element Synthesis screen.
The view area is subdivided in two sides:
– Left side: lists the Maps/Submaps/NE created.A description has already been given in previous paragraphs.
– Right side: lists details (property) of the selected NE (NE type, address, status, etc).
The main general uses are:
– Selection / multiselection of an object
– Using the “map tree” (left side of the view area)
– Using the “detail list” of the object (right side of the view area)
– Moving the view area
– Left border led symbols
– Warning symbols
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
249
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
5.3.3.1 Selecting and deselecting objects on maps
This section deals with the selection of one or more symbols (Maps/Submaps/NE) and their deselection.
– Selecting/deselecting one symbol.
To select a single symbol click on the symbol using the ”Select” mouse button.Selection is indicated with a border line around the selected object.To deselect a symbol click on another one.
– Selecting multiple symbols.
The selection of multiple symbols may be necessary if an operation has to be undertaken on a setof symbols at the same time (for example, start supervision of a set of NEs).To select multiple symbols in a submap, click on one symbol and simultaneously press the Shift keyand an arrow key to extend the selection to other symbols.
The following structure is shown in the screen where the selected items are inserted on a tabbedpane, at the top of the “detail list” (right side).
Multiple selection
Figure 227. Obtaining multiple symbols view.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
250
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
5.3.3.2 Using the “map tree” (left side of the view area)
The left side of the view area is used to present the object (Maps/Submaps/NE) selected by the operator.
One map at a time is selected.
Referring to the following figure, for each object a dedicated row resumes general information:
• Map and Submap rows
On the row are inserted (from left to right):
– a little box with a “+” or “–” symbol inside which, respectively permits or not to zoom,showing the contained Submaps and NE
– a map/submap symbol– a severity alarm synthesis flag (icon with LED shape)– map/submap name
• NE rows
On the row are inserted (from left to right):
– a connection symbol to indicate the Physical Connection Statuses of the NE– an icon with box shape to indicate the Supervision state of the NE.– an icon with LED shape to indicate the Alarm Status of the NE.– User Label, Location Name, Type and Release version of the NE
More detailed information on symbols of management state are available at para.5.4.1.1 on page 256.
Map tree area
Map row
Submap row
NE row
Figure 228. Structure of the Map view (left side of the view area)
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
251
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
5.3.3.3 Using the “list of details” (right side of the view area)
The right side of the view area is used to present to the operator more detailed information on the object(Maps/Submaps/NE) selected in the map on the left side.
An object list of details is shown at a time.
When a multiselection is operated (as for para 5.3.3.1 on page 249) on the top of the list of details areathe selected objects are present in a tabbed pane each one with a dedicated item (see Figure 227. onpage 249).
Clicking on one of these items the relevant details are given.
The information in a list differs for object type and it is explained in the following paragraphs.
5.3.3.3.1 List of details for Map/Submap
The detailed information presented is (see following figure):
• severity alarm synthesis flags (icon with led shape)Indicates the presence of alarms for the whole map containing submaps and NEsInformation is given according to the severity (critical, major, minor, warning, indeterminate)The number of alarms for each severity is also indicatedColor of each flag depends on the alarm condition
• description of the map/submap
• file information is present at the bottom of the view (examples: type, unsaved changesinformation, path)
List of details for Map
Figure 229. Structure of the “list of details” view for Map/Submaps (right side of the view area)
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
252
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
5.3.3.3.2 List of details for NE
The detailed information (see following Figure 230. ) presented is:
• severity alarm synthesis flags (LED–shaped icon)Indicates the alarm presence on the selected NEInformation is given according to the severity (critical, major, minor, warning, indeterminate)The number of alarms for each severity is also indicatedThe color of each flag depends on the alarm condition
• Description of the Network ElementThis data is stored in the Craft Terminal.
• the status of the communication between the Craft Terminal and the NE, with the informationof Local (physically connected) or Remote NE. The indication will be for example “notconnected”, “reachable”, “not reachable”.
• User label, typically for a NE denomination.This data is stored in the Network Element.
• Location name, typically for a geographical indication (example: city, floor, row, rack).This data is stored in the Network Element.
• the Network Element type (example “ne1650smc”)
• the Network Element version (example “1.1”)
• the Network Element NSAP address
• the Network Element Transport SELector, Session SELector and Presentation SELectoraddress
When the NE is not supervised, part of this information cannot be accessed.
List of details for NE
Figure 230. Structure of the list of details view for NE (right side of the view area)
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
253
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
5.3.3.4 Moving the view area
The view area, or the detailed list side only, can be resized or moved, positioning the mouse pointer onthe border of the area.
The operation permits to discover indication as, for example, the item of the following paragraph.
5.3.3.5 Led symbols on the left border of the view area and relevant data
On the left of the view area (see following Figure 231. ) are present LED–shaped symbols.
Moving the view area towards the right side as for the previous paragraph, are also shown the data relativeto the symbols, i.e.: ( see Figure 232. )
• Nes IM: indicates if the application is properly started.• Retix LL (OSI): indicates if the connection to the OSI layer of the CT is active• Local NE address: indicates if the OSI address of the Local NE connected is known• CT address: indicates if the OSI address of the Craft Terminal is known
Green indicates regular, red indicates problems.
Note that the led shape symbols referred to the local NE and CT addresses are red if the link connectionwith the NE is unplugged.
5.3.3.6 Warning symbols
On the Network Element Synthesis view (see following Figure 231. ) are present warning symbols:
• On the Maps tabbed pane• On the title bar
The color of the warning symbols are:
• Grey: warning not present• Blue: normal warning• Red: important warning
Warning symbols inform the operator of modification in the alarms, connections and management statusof the map. In the area view the detailed status can be checked.Warning symbols are activated for about 10 seconds when the “Maps” tab is selected.When the “Event log” or “Activity log” tabs are open warning symbols are fixed active , waiting for the“Maps” tab selection. Then they remain active for 10 seconds.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
254
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
Left border led symbols
Warningsymbols
Figure 231. Warning and left border led symbols in the view area.
left borderData referred to
LED symbols
Figure 232. Showing data relative to the left border symbols
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
255
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
5.4 Supervisioning the Network elements
The previous chapter dealt with general Map, Submap and Network Element construction and managing.
This chapter describes the steps involved in:
– the supervision of the Network Element, permitting to access the EML–USM– changing the NSAP address inside the NE– the Alarm Surveillance of the NE
For the Maps and NE creation refer to para 5.3.1 on page 232.
Before entering the supervision of the NE it is important to resume the management state indication of theNetwork Element Synthesis screen.
These states will be always shown to the operator to indicate the NE condition.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
256
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
5.4.1 NE management states
5.4.1.1 Introduction
The elementary building blocks of any telecommunication network are the Network Elements (NEs). Thissection presents the different management states of a NE from the Craft Terminal point of view.Each NE is presented in the map view area (left side) of the Network Element Synthesis screen (see asan example Figure 228. on page 250) with:
• an icon to indicate the physical connection status of the NE.The icon can assume different shapes to indicate the various physical connection statuses.
• an icon with box shape to indicate the Supervision state of the NE.The box icon can assume different aspects to indicate the various statuses.
• an icon with led shape to indicate the alarm status of the NE.The led icon can assume different colors to indicate the various alarm statuses.
– Physical connection state: relates to the connection between the Craft Terminal and the NE:
• (Disconnected plug): for Local NE, cable disconnected between the Craft Terminal andthe relevant local NE.
• (Connected plug): for Local NE, cable connected between the Craft Terminal and therelevant local NE.
• (Dashed line): for Remote NE, and all NEs not physically connected to the Craft Terminal
(ECC SDH channel or LAN is used).
– Supervision state: gives information on the supervision state of the NE.
• (Box and question mark): the NE is not being supervised (e.g. it has just been created to
the Craft Terminal).• (Box and lens): first phase of Supervision Start, NE type and release are being discovered
• (Box only): NE type and release are discovered
• (Box and sandglass): final phase of Supervision Start, NE is being supervised
• (Box and lamps): the NE is under supervision.
• (Box, lamps and sandglass): the NE supervision is being Stopped
• (Dashed box): OSI network layer is down or restarting
– Alarm status : indicates the highest severity alarm currently present on the NE.
• Critical: the NE operational state is disabled, or the NE presents malfunctions. An immediatecorrective action is required. Led icon is red.
• Major: the OS and NE MIBs are misaligned, or the NE presents malfunctions. An Urgentcorrective action is required. Led icon is orange.
• Minor : the NE presents malfunctions. A corrective action should be taken in order to preventmore serious faults (for example service affecting). Led icon is yellow.
• Warning : it indicates the detection of a potential or impending service affecting fault before anysignificant effects have been felt. Action should be taken to further diagnose (if necessary) andcorrect the problem in order to prevent it from becoming a more serious fault. Led icon is cyan.
• Indeterminate : the Craft Terminal has not received an update of the current alarms. Led iconis white. Not operative
Green color means regular condition.To supervise the NE the Craft Terminal establishes a permanent association with the NE.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
257
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
5.4.1.2 Sequence of different management states.
The following representation with the states evolution may be helpful to understand the way in which thedifferent management states are interrelated.The management states change depending on the operations undertaken. The various managementstates are represented with the symbols showed to the operator in the screen.
Start SUPERVISION
BEING DISCOVERED
NE TYPE ANDRELEASE DISCOVERED
STARTING SUPERVISION
START SUPERVISIONSUCCESSFULLY COMPLETED
STOP SPVKO
Stop SUPERVISION
STOP SPVOK
ACTION
STATE SYMBOLS
AUTOMATICOPERATION
LEGENDA:
CREATE NE
Figure 233. Evolution of the NE management states.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
258
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
5.4.2 Supervising NEs
5.4.2.1 Starting supervision of NEs
Supervising NEs is an essential aspect of management. It permits the communication between the NEand the Craft Terminal, enabling the gathering of information concerning the behavior of the NE withrespect to its functional state.
You can start the supervision of:
– a Map/Submap: in this case, the operation is performed on all NEs in the map/submap.– one or more NEs: in this case, only one or a set of NEs is concerned by the operation. The above cases are identical in the operations that are undertaken but differ in the number and type ofthe symbols selected. In this section the NE creation case is treated.
N.B. The NE addresses must have been correctly declared before starting supervision of those NEs.Otherwise error messages will be displayed.
Start supervision is only allowed if the NE management states are the following:– Supervision: Created – for Local NE: connected plug ( )
Select the NEs to supervise in the Network Element Synthesis views. It is highlighted.
Select the Start option from the Supervision pull down menu as for the following figure.
Figure 234. Starting supervision from the Network Element Synthesis views.
In this phase the icon representing the management supervision state of the NE evolves according to theflow chart of Figure 233. on page 257.
The Box and lamps symbol ( ) indicates that the ”Start Supervision” operation is successfully
completed.
Once the Supervised state has been established, an association between the NEs and the Craft Terminalis created.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
259
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
This association based on ACSE/ROSE/CMISE protocols, implies that the Craft Terminal constantlysupervises the NE. From now on alarm indication and counters in the CT representation will take intoaccount of alarm states change as reported by the NE. This association will be released by the CraftTerminal, only when the supervision is stopped. NE or Craft Terminal failure automatically cancels theassociation which is automatically re–established by the Craft Terminal when the NE becomes availableonce again (in case of NE failure or network failure) or when the Craft Terminal is restarted (in case of CraftTerminal failure).
5.4.2.2 Stopping NE supervision
As for the ”Start Supervision” operation, the ”Stop Supervision” operation can be done from the NetworkElement Synthesis views:
They allow you to stop the supervision of:
– A Map/Submap: in this case, the operation is performed on all NEs in the map/submap.– One or more NEs: in this case, only one or a set of NEs is concerned by the operation. As for the ”Start Supervision” operation, the NE creation case is explained in this section.
This operation is only allowed if the NE management states are the following:– Supervision: Supervised – for Local access: Any state
From the Network Topology view select the NEs the supervision of which you require to stop. Select theStop option from the Supervision pull down menu as shown in the following figure.
Figure 235. Stopping supervision from the Network Element Synthesis views.
The Box, lamps and sandglass symbol ( ) which appears indicates the progress of the ”Stop
Supervision” operation
The Box only symbol ( ) automatically indicates that the ”Stop Supervision” operation has been
successfully executed.
The displayed alarm status of the relevant NE will be no more updated.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
260
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
5.4.3 Login a Network Element
Login a NE means entering the NE management functions, monitoring and changing the operating modeof the different equipment that may be presented.
To login the equipment, open the map on which the NE is located.Select the NE you want to connect to. It is then highlighted.
This operation is only allowed if the NE management states are the following:– Supervision: Supervised – for Local NE: connected plug
Select the Show Equipment option from the Supervision pull down menu as shown in Figure 236. below.
Figure 236. Login a NE.
A Login dialog box will be opened (see Figure 237. ); type the Login name and Password.
Figure 237. Login and Password dialog box
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
261
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
The NE is entered showing, as an example the view of Figure 238. below.
The detailed description of the NE Management is inserted in the Operator’s Handbook dedicated tothe specific NE.
Figure 238. Network Element views after Login (example).
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
262
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
5.4.4 Changing the address inside a Network Element
Once the NE is supervised, the NE address inside the NE may be individually changed.
To change the address for an equipment, open the map on which the NE is located.Select the NE whose address you want to change. It is then highlighted.
This operation is only allowed if the NE management states are the following:– Supervision: Supervised – for Local NE: connected plug
Select the Setting option from the NE Addresses pull down menu as shown in Figure 239. below.
Figure 239. Enter the option to set the address inside a NE.
The dialogue box which appears (see following figure) permits two selections:
Figure 240. Modifying NE address inside a NE: selection.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
263
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
In this figure can be defined the:
• OSI stack settingThe same dialogue box described at para 5.3.1.2.1 on page 239 opens, allowing you to modifythe addressing information.
• Other settingThe entry box of the following figure is presented.To perform the selection click on Set NE Address. A new figure will be presented .
Figure 241. Modifying NE address inside a NE: other settings
In this figure can be set the:
• Location Name: typically used for physical identification of the NE, for example city, station,floor, row, rack, etc.
• User Label: typically used for NE denomination
To change or enter the Location Name or User Label click on Change. The following figure (example)opens:
Figure 242. Modifying NE address inside a NE: change Location Name.
Write the denomination and confirm clicking on OK or Cancel the selection.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
264
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
5.4.5 Show NE Alarms
The NE alarm information can be displayed after having supervised the NE.
To enable the Show NE alarms for an equipment, open the map on which the NE is located.Select the NE the alarm status of which you want to check. It is then highlighted.
This operation is only allowed if the NE management states are the following:– Supervision: Supervised – for Local NE: connected plug
Select the Show NE Alarms option from the Supervision pull down menu as shown in Figure 243. below.
Figure 243. Show NE Alarms
Selecting this menu option is displayed (after an intermediate automatic view) the view enabling Alarmmanagement as shown in Figure 244. below.For the detailed Alarm Surveillance description refer to the dedicated Handbook.For the Alarm Surveillance maintenance data refer to the Operator’s Handbook dedicated to the NE.
Figure 244. Network Element Alarm Surveillance views (example).
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
265
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
5.5 Using Craft Terminal Environment
With the Craft Terminal Environment the operator can obtain management information and data onprocess and software of the managed NE, Backup and Restore NES configuration data files, as explainedin the following paragraphs.
5.5.1 Process Control
This option permits the operator to list the process, running or stopped, on the Craft Terminal.
The process control is selectable but reserved for Alcatel personnel use, typically for assistance.
This operation is independent from the NE management states.
Select the Process Control option from the CT Environment pull down menu as shown in next figure.
Figure 245. Selecting Process Control
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
266
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
All the processes are showed on the screen as for the following figure.
Figure 246. Example of Process Control view
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
267
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
5.5.2 List Software
This option permits the operator to list the software platforms and management software installed in theCraft Terminal during the installation procedure, and useful for Network Element management.
This operation is independent from the NE management states.
Select the List Software option from the CT Environment pull down menu as shown in the followingfigure.
Figure 247. Selecting List Software
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
268
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
The whole list is presented on the screen, as for the following example.
Figure 248. List Software example
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
269
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
5.5.3 Backup
This operation permits to save the data configured in the Network Element Synthesis view (mainly thecreated maps) towards files in the directories of the PC disks.To save the NES data select the Backup option from the CT Environment menu (see next figure).
Figure 249. Backup of NES data
Select the directory where to save as for the following figure:
Figure 250. Select directory for backup
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
270
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
In the saved file name is indicated the date of the operation:
Figure 251. Backup file denomination
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
271
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
5.5.4 Restore
This operation permits to restore in the Network Element Synthesis view the configuration data previouslysaved in a files in the directories of the PC disks.To import the NEs data select the Restore option from the CT Environment pull down menu (see nextfigure):
Figure 252. Restore NES data
Select the directory where the NEs configuration data are present as for the following figure:
Figure 253. Select directory for restore
After the operation, the restored data are present in the NES view; for example the maps of the previouslysaved file are summed to the maps created in the view.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
272
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
5.5.5 ANTP Configuration
This option permits to manage the Network Time Protocol for the Craft Terminal.
Select the ANTP Configuration option from the CT Environment pull down menu as shown in thefollowing figure.
Figure 254. Shortcut to ANTP settings
Two options menu are available:
– ANTP Server address automatic management
– Shortcut to ANTP Settings
Selecting the Shortcut to ANTP Settings option the Alcatel Network Time Protocol Setting window ispresented on the screen, as for the following example.
Figure 255. Select the ANTP Configuration options
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
273
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
The ANTP component is able to provide both the ANTP–client and ANTP–server role at the same time.The ANTP is configurable inside the CT to cover one role or both depending on need as follows:
• The Enable Client mode: when selected, the CT receives the time from the NE
• The Enable Server mode: when selected, the CT transmits the time to the NE
In the usual CT scenario it is assumed that the NEs get the Time from an OS and the CT sets its timeaccordingly (see Figure 256. ).
In these conditions, the “mode” configurations are:
– The ANTP Enable Client mode is enabled. The CT ANTP–component works as ANTPclient and it has to keep the time in synch. with the NE time. The NE is the source of theTime for the CT.
– The ANTP Enable server mode is disabled. The CT ANTP–component does not supplytime to other ANTP peers. If the mode is enabled, the CT is able to supply the Time.
LAN
F
NE
NE
NE
NE CRAFT
TERMINAL
OPERATIONSSYSTEM
TIME
TIME
Figure 256. ANTP: usual CT scenario
The “ANTP client” part of the window display two fields for the Server network addresses Main and Sparesubdivided in “Area Address” and “System Identifier”.
Click OK to apply the ANTP configuration parameters
The ANTP option is disabled (greyed) if the ANTP component is not installed.
The ANTP component is inside the Lower Layer manager software component that is asoftware layer of the CD–ROM.
The Enable Client option is absent in the view when the operator using the CT has not privilegeto set the NE time.
The privilege is always available for operators belonging to ”Administrators” or ”Power Users”.The specific Right is called ”Change the system time”.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
274
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
For the ANTP Server address automatic management there are two operating mode:
– when selected, the previously selected Enable Client and Enable Server are operative. After the“Start” of the “Supervision”, the NE and CT times are automatically controlled as described in the“details on Automatic Controls” in the following.Automatic assignment of the Main ANTP Address option gives the opportunity to have the CraftTerminal time synchronized with the local NE you are plugged in: after each Start Supervision on thelocal NE its NSAP address is written in the ANTP Settings so that it will be used as the source of thetime.
– when not selected, the Start up only behavior is enable i.e., the CT starts only the ANTP componentbut the Enable Client and Enable Server selections are not operative and no automatic control ofthe NE and CT time is made. See ANTP configured by the user.
Details on the Automatic Control:
When a “Start Supervision” request is completed, the CT gets the NE time and compares it with theNT time.If the difference is lower than a configured delta (1 day), the CT assumes that the NE and CT haveboth an acceptable Time and the difference is due to clock misalignment. In this case the CT willrealign the NT time with the NE time.
If the difference is higher than a configured delta (1 day), the CT assumes that the NE or the CT hasunacceptable Time difference.In this case the operator is informed with a Time Mismatch report of both the Times: in the exampleof report of the following figure the NE has just been installed and it has the factory set Time (1970).
Figure 257. ANTP: Time Mismatch report
If the operator clicks on Yes, the CT synchronization with the NE time will be disable until its next StartSupervision.
If the operator clicks on No,the operator can realign the NE time with the CT time with the followingsequence of commands:
• in the NES view activates the “Start” of the “Supervision“ and the “NE Login” to access theUSM of the Network Element.
• Open the NE Time option of the Configuration menu as for the example of Figure 258.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
275
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
• In Figure 259. that opens, click on the Set button to Set NE Time with OS Time. This permitsto realign the NE time with the CT time
Figure 258. Selecting the NE Time option in the USM.
Figure 259. NE Time dialogue box in the USM.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
276
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ANTP configured by the user
If the ANTP–component is not under CT control, it can be started and configured using its interface.These operating conditions are suited for the situation where, for example:
• The NEs are not connected to OS to get the ANTP time
• The OS is not available
To configure the ANTP the operator can follow this sequence of commands:
• in the Start menu open the Alcatel>Alcatel Network Time Protocol>ANTP Settings option( see Figure 260. ).
• In the opened view ( see example of Figure 261. ) manually insert the NE address and theEnable Client and Enable Server selections.
Figure 260. ANTP setting selection
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
277
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
Figure 261. ANTP setting
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
278
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
5.6 Administrating files
With the Craft Terminal File Administrator option, the operator can manage NE software, referred to NEsoftware download or NE configuration data, as explained in the following paragraphs.
5.6.1 Software Administration
This option permits the operator to install the Package containing the Equipment Software on the CraftTerminal.
It will be subsequently downloaded on the NE (by means of the EML–USM screen menu after the NELogin) for release upgrading, following the equipment evolution.
This operation is independent from the NE management state and must be executed with the followingprocedure:
N.B. The NE software package must be already installed in the Craft Terminal. The NE softwarepackage is contained in the CD–ROM used for the installation of the Equipment software.
5.6.1.1 NE Software package installation procedure
The following procedure allows the NE software package installation. According to the customerrequirement two types of installation are possible:
[1] If only SDH software package installation is required follow the instruction from point c ) to point e )and than download the software package SDH (example 1660SM 2.1B.09) from the EML–USM(refer to the relevant Operator’s Handbook).
[2] If SDH+”Specific Software” package installation is required follow the instruction from point c ) topoint n ). In the example that follows will be described the ATM specific software installation; followingthe same rule will be possible to install also the IP specific software.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
279
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
Procedure
c ) From Network Element Synthesis (NES) choose the SWP Administration option of theSupervision –> File Administration menu (see Figure 262. )
Figure 262. SWP Administration menu
After the selection Figure 263. will be opened.
Figure 263. Software Package Administration view
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
280
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
d ) Select the <SDH/WDM> tag
e ) Press the <INSTALL> button to install the relevant software package.In the window that opens select the directory where the NE software package file has been installed(typically is Alcatel/usm/ect/swdw/<equipment name>/<version>/<descriptor file>) and execute (seeFigure 264. )
SDH/WDM SERV. SPEC. OMSN
SDH/WDM SERV. SPEC. OMSN
Figure 264. SDH software package installation
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
281
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
f ) Insert the ATM CD ROM in the computer
g ) Select the <SERV. SPEC.> tag
h ) Press the <INSTALL> button to install the ATM software package present on the ATM CD ROMIn the window that opens select the directory where the ATM software package file has been installed(typically is /ect/swdw/<atm>/<version>/<descriptor file>) and execute (see Figure 265. )
SDH/WDM SERV. SPEC. OMSN
SDH/WDM SERV. SPEC. OMSN
Figure 265. ATM software package installation (example)
Click on Ok to continue;
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
282
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
i ) Select the <SDH/WDM> tag
j ) Select the SDH software package base onto which ATM software package has to be merged
k ) Press <Create Enhanced> to launch the software merging process and create the SDH+ATMsoftware package
The New Software package will be created (see Figure 266. )
SDH/WDM SERV. SPEC. OMSN
SDH/WDM SERV. SPEC. OMSN
Figure 266. OMSN enhanced software package creation (part A)
Click on Yes button to continue; Figure 267. will be opened.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
283
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
OMSN name
OMSN version
SDH/WDM SERV. SPEC. OMSN
Figure 267. OMSN enhanced software package creation (part B)
The originated “Enhanced” software package has a new label as follows:
OMSN name = is the SDH name + “E” letterOMSN version = is the SDH version
Example: Starting from SDH SWP 1660SM ver. 3.xy.wz will be created the OMSN SWP1660SME ver. 3.xy.wz
l ) Select the previously created software package (example 1660SME 3.1.08)
m ) Select the ATM software package (in the right view) (example ATM 1.01.07)
n ) Press the <ADD> button , so the new software package will be created (refer to Figure 268. )
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
284
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
SDH/WDM SERV. SPEC. OMSN
SDH/WDM SERV. SPEC. OMSN
Figure 268. Enhanced software package (SDH + ATM)
It is now possible to download the enhanced software package (SDH + ATM) from the EML–USM(refer to the procedure detailed on the Operator’s Handbook of the dedicated NE)
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
285
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
5.6.2 Mib copies
This option permits the operator to import / export files containing the configuration data of the NE.
It is used to avoid a complete configuration phase of a NE with the USM menus, copying a previousconfiguration and loading it on another NE, reducing time when configurations are very similar.
The procedure to copy the configuration data is obtained using both the screen platforms:
• the Network Element Synthesis, the platform described in this section
• the USM platform of the equipment, detailed in the Operator’s Handbook dedicated to the NE
5.6.2.1 Saving configuration data to export
To execute the procedure, the following operations must have already been performed:
– After the NE creation, start supervision and login, the operator has to create the configuration datafor a NE, using the USM screen view.
– At this point it is possible to save them with the Mib option of the USM view of the followingFigure 269. ; write the Backup name and click on Backup.Details on the EML–USM are given in the Operator’s Handbook of the dedicated NE.
Figure 269. Mib copies: save data with EML–USM view.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
286
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
The configuration data can be now “exported” executing the following operations:
– Open the Network Element Synthesis view
– From the Supervision pull down menu select the File Administrator, then the Mib copies optionand finally the Save to disk option, as shown in Figure 270.
Figure 270. Mib copies: save to disk with Network Element Synthesis view.
– Figure 271. opens, showing the folder where all the saved files are present.
Figure 271. Mib copies: showing the folder with the saved files.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
287
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
N.B. Files are saved with default denominations that cannot be changed.
Anyway the backup name given in Figure 269. will be kept in the program and showed whenthe file will be imported.
Before saving another file, check the denomination given to the previously saved file, torecognize the new one.
– Open in sequence the folders to show the file to be saved as indicated in the example of Figure 272.
Figure 272. Mib copies: select the file to be saved.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
288
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
– Select it and click Open.
– Select the path where to save in the file as indicated in the example of Figure 273. on page 288. thatopens.
Figure 273. Mib copies: select the path where to save.
– At the end a confirmation message is received:
Figure 274. Mib copies: saving confirmation message.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
289
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
5.6.2.2 Loading configuration data to import
This operation is only allowed if the NE management states are the following:– Supervision: Supervised – for Local NE: connected plug
Execute the following procedure to “import” the configuration data:
– Open the Network Element Synthesis view and select the NE to configure
– From the Supervision pull down menu select the File Administrator, then the Mib copies optionand finally the Load from disk option, as shown in Figure 275.
Figure 275. Mib copies: load from disk with Network Element Synthesis view.
– Select the path from which the configuration has to be copied as indicated in the example ofFigure 276. and click Open. Figure 277. will be opened.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
290
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
Click on ”Browse”
Choose ”Look in”
Select the folder
Click on ”Open”
Figure 276. Mib copies: select the directory containing the fie to be copied from disk.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
291
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
Click on Search to display the MIB file name (CHECK1 in the example of Figure 278. ) and select it, thenclick on OK button.
Figure 277. MIB copy: directory selected
Figure 278. MIB copy: file selection
– The file is automatically saved in a dedicated path; a confirmation message is presented:
Figure 279. Mib copies: coping confirmation message.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
292
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
The imported data can be now used to configure the NE executing the following operations:
– Start a Craft Terminal session.
– Start the Supervision and Login the NE to configure.
– Send the configuration data to the NE with the Mib option of the USM view of Figure 280. selectingthe file from the list and clicking on Restore.The file denomination listed is the same of the one given by the operator to the backup file duringthe saving operation.Details on the EML–USM are given in the Operator’s Handbook of the dedicated NE.
Figure 280. Mib copies: save data with EML–USM view.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
293
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
5.7 Alcatel program tools
In this chapter are presented the various options available executing the Start > Program > Alcatel.
The presence of these tools depends on the Network Element type; some options will be present for allthe NEs, others dedicated to groups or to a single NE.
The main options listed are:
• CT–K (version). It opens the following item:
– 1320CT (version): it permits to start up the Craft Terminal management software.
– 1320CT Customization: it must be executed in order to let the CT know the hostnamechange, as instructed in para. 3.4.3 on page 114.
– 1320CT Trace Level High: when selected, it permits to save more details on internal CraftTerminal processes (for example in the Process Control option of the CT Environmentmenu). Typically used by Alcatel personnel for assistance.
– 1320CT Trace Level Low: when selected, it permits to save less details on internal CraftTerminal processes.
• Alcatel Network Time Protocol; it opens the following items:
– ANTP Manager: allows to start the time synchronization
– ANTP Readme: it gives general information like the use of ANTP, requirement anddocumentation
– ANTP Settings: allows to set the ANTP Client address main and spare. For details seeparagraph 5.5.5 on page 272.
– ANTP Settings Help: display the ANTP Help file
• Lower Layers IP; it opens the following items:
– Lower Layers IP Manager Setup Help: allows to set an adapter and the IP COM addressnecessary for the communication with the ISA boards.
– Lower Layers Manager: starts the Lower Layers Manager; an icon is visible in theWindows Task Bar.
– Lower Layers Manager Help: display the Lower Layers Manager Help file
– Lower Layers Settings: allows to set the serial port and the System Identifier necessaryfor the communication with the NE
– Lower Layers Settings Help: display the help file to set the serial port and the SystemIdentifier
• Q3 CT–K ADD–ON (version). It opens the following item:
– Q3 Add–On Customization: it must be executed in order to let the CT know the hostnamechange, as explained in para. 3.4.3 on page 114.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
294
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
• COMMON ADM USM (version). It opens the following item:
– USM Customization: it must be executed in order to let the CT know the hostname change,as instructed in para. 3.4.3 on page 114.
• SIBDL (available only after having installed the SIBDL software); it opens the following items:
– FTP Target: it is a utility to transfer files to the NE controller
– SIBDL: allows to load Software in the flash card present on the NE Controller unit; fordetails see the NE relevant Operator’s Handbook.
– SIBDL Help: gives details information on SIBDL use.
– SIBDL Readme: gives general information about SIBDL
– Update Raw loader: allows to update the NE firmware
• Equipment parameter tool: not managed by 1320CT operator. Referred to 1320 NXconfigurations.
• Graphical configurator: it permits to create the network representation if dealing with aRemote Craft Terminal for QB3* Network Element. The description of the complete procedureis inserted in the Operator’s Handbook of the relevant QB3* NE.
• MM file generator: not managed by 1320CT operator. Referred to 1320 NX configurations.
• NECTAS: it permits to manage QB3* NE and QB2 NE as indicated at para.5.7.2 on page 296.
• Parameter Tools: see next para. 5.7.1.
• 1320CT Backup & Restore Tools:
– Backup & Restore Help On Line: it runs the help on line documentation concerning thethe Backup and restore utility.Included in a 1320CT there are some Backup and Restore Utility Tools. They are intendedto help user saving and retrieving Kernel and AddOns data, produced during 1320CTexecution.The System Backup & System Restore combination is also useful to keep safe andRE–use important data when performed a CT–K/AddOn SW upgrade or a Q3CT–P –––>CT–K migration procedure.
– Backup Deletion: allows user to delete a previously created backup. ; for details run theBackup & Restore Help On Line documentation.
– Q3 CT–P Data Backup: allows user to save useful data recorded during Q3CT–P runningbefore remove it and install a more recent CT–K. Given it works like a System Backup,saved data can be restored with a regular “System Restore” operation; for details run theBackup & Restore Help On Line documentation.
– System Backup: System Backup Tool allows user to save useful data recording them intolocal disks (removable diskette or hard disks). System Backup Tool displays a user dialog reporting a Domain’s List; the user can selectone or more of the following items according to his need:
• System Network• Software Download (MIB backups included)• SNMP MIB Backup
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
295
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
For details run the Backup & Restore Help On Line documentation.
– System Restore : allows user to get back previously backuped data ; for details run theBackup & Restore Help On Line documentation.
5.7.1 Parameter tools
Select Start>Programs>Alcatel>Parameters tool, the view of next figure is presented.
Figure 281. Parameter tool
Select (�) the Info model craft terminal option.
All the other settings are not used by the 1320CT operator. They are referred to 1320 NX configurations.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
296
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
5.7.2 NECTAS option
This option permits to manage QB3* Network Element and Network Element with QB2 interface,using the same Craft Terminal that is managing the QB3 Info Model NE.NECTAS is the acronym of the software on which the QB3* NE are based.
The 1320 Craft Terminal must be physically connected to a QB3 Info Model NE.
A network with QB3* Network Element and Q2 Mediation elements must be created using the Graphicalconfigurator tool, following the description of the QB3* NE Operator’s Handbook.
Execute the Start>Program>Alcatel>Nectas command.
The following login view is presented, asking for Operator identifier and password.
Figure 282. Operator identifier and password
Hence the Alarm Synthesis window will appear.
The structure and the options of this window is the same of the one presented in the Craft Terminal viewfor the QB3* Network Element.
The relevant description is inserted in the Operator’s Handbook of the QB3* Network Element.
Only menus which differ are detailed in the present paragraph.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
297
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
Select the All Element option of the View menu as indicated in the following figure.
Figure 283. All Element selection
One string is shown in the Alarm Synthesis window view (see next figure). It can be “ADM TH” or “ADMLH” followed by the version indication.“T” stands for virtual “Transmission” part of the NE, “H” stands for “High” hierarchical level and “L” standsfor “Low” hierarchical level.In the example the “ADM TL 10” indication is present.
This string represents the interface part of the QB3 Info Model NE, used to manage the QB3*Network Element.
Virtual Transmission string
Figure 284. QB3* Network Element management view
Click on the string and select the Application Choice menu. The following view is presented, listing theavailable menu.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
298
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
Figure 285. Application choice for QB3* Network Element management
These menus are described in next paragraphs.
At the end of the whole procedure, the following will be present on the Alarm Synthesis window:
• One string representing the QB3* Network Element management interface of the QB3 NE(virtual Transmission)
• One string representing the QB2 Network Element management interface (virtual MediationFunction) of the QB3 NE
• one string for each QB3* Network Element and Q2 Mediation element managed in the network
Clicking on the equipment name it is possible to access the relevant applications.For the Application description refer to the relevant Operator’s Handbook.
Figure 286. illustrates the principle scheme: in a QB3 NE ring, one NE is configured with interfacestowards QB3* NE and Q2 NE. A QB3*NE also interfaces QB2 NE. The remote QB3 Info Model NEs aremanaged with the NEs view described at chapter 5.3 on page 231.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
299
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
NE
NE
NE
NE
Q2
NE*
Q2NE
Q2NE
Q2NE
QB3*NE
Q2NE
Q2NE
Q2NE
Q2
QB3*NE
QB3*NE
NE: QB3 Info Model Network Element QB3*NE: QB3* Network Element
Q2NE: Q2 Network ElementNE*: Interface for QB3* Network Element
Q2: interface for QB2 Network Element
Figure 286. NECTAS management principle scheme
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
300
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
5.7.2.1 QB3* NE management: Alarm, Status and Control
Figure 287. represents the alarms, status and control application screen.
The screen shows the status of the two Operative Systems (if any) , indicating the one (the ”OS Main” orthe ”OS Spare” ) managing the “QB3* Network Element management part” of the NE.
The labels at the top of the AS&C screen indicate alarm information referred to the same NE part. Onlythe AE and the OS isolation alarms are active. The OS severity is fixed to NG, therefore the AT, UG andIND alarms are meaningless.
Figure 287. QB3* Network Element management: alarms, status and control application
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
301
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
5.7.2.2 QB3* NE management: local configuration application
This application is used to configure the data necessary to manage the QB3* NE.
Selecting the Table menu, Figure 288. shows the local configuration table list:
• Local configuration
• OS configuration table
• MF configuration
• R–ECT configuration
Each of the above tables will be detailed in the paragraphs that follow.
All the options are described also if some NEs don’t contain the complete list.
Figure 288. QB3* Network Element management: local configuration application list
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
302
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
5.7.2.2.1 QB3* NE management: local Configuration Table
This table ( Figure 289. ) allows the user to insert the 7.1 address of the “QB3 NE virtual Transmissionpart” when the NE interfaces QB3* Network Elements.
It must be different from the other QB3* NE 7.1 addresses and Mediation Function addresses of the localnetwork.
Figure 289. QB3* Network Element management: Local Configuration
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
303
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
5.7.2.2.2 QB3* NE management: OS configuration table
The screen of Figure 290. is dedicated to the MAIN and SPARE OS Local Address.
The two OSs (main and spare) that manage the “QB3 NE virtual Transmission” can be different from thetwo managing the QB3 NE or the “QB3 NE virtual Mediation Function”.Therefore their addresses can be different.
The OS NSAP address is composed of:
– Area address– System ID
At the bottom of the screen the table defines the switch condition between Main and Spare OS:
• enable / disable the Automatic Switch – Over• enable / disable Automatic Switch – Back
The ”switch over” option set at ”Yes” enables the spare OS connection when the main OS is no more active.If the main OS returns to the active status and the switch back parameter is set to Yes, the dialogueswitches to the main OS.The ”switch over” parameter set to “no” prevents the spare OS connection in case of OS main connectionfailure.The ”switch back” option set to “no” prevents the switch between spare and main OS from being revertive.
Figure 290. QB3* Network Element management: OS configuration table
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
304
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
5.7.2.2.3 QB3* NE management: Mediation Function Configuration
This table ( Figure 291. ) allows the user to enable the “QB3 NE virtual Mediation Function” when the NEinterfaces non SDH equipment through the Q2 interface.
The 7.1 address of the Q2 interface must be inserted.
It must be different from the other QB3* NE 7.1 addresses of the local network.
After enabling the MF function, in the Alarm Synthesis view is presented a string representing theMediation Function of the QB3 Network Element, which manages the Network Element with QB2interface.
The MF applications are detailed in para 5.7.2.4 at page 308.
See Figure 286. on page 299 for the basic scheme.
Figure 291. QB3* Network Element management: MF Configuration
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
305
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
5.7.2.2.4 QB3* NE management: R–ECT Configuration
The table allows the user to configure the remote QB3* NEs which are managed by the NE acting as aMNE (Master Network Element).
The NEs are selected through the table indicated in Figure 292. on page 305
The table contains 31 entries, each of them describing one remote QB3* NE.
For each entry the user can configure ( see Figure 293. ) the following information:
– enabling the Entry when the NE must be reached by the Master of the network
– NSAP address of the Remote QB3* NE:
• Area Address• System Identifier
– 7.1 address of Remote QB3* NE
In order to do these configurations, the application uses 31 different screens, one for any of the allowedNEs of the network.
The keys ” NEXT ” and ” PREVIOUS ” allow the user to move among the 31 screens.
Figure 292. QB3* Network Element management: R–ECT configuration (choice of elements)
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
306
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
Figure 293. QB3* Network Element management: R–ECT configuration
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
307
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
5.7.2.3 QB3* NE management: administrative application
The Administrative application is used for the station operators management.It is the same application described in the Operator’s handbook of the QB3* NE, except the Date Changepresented in next para.
5.7.2.3.1 Date Change
After having selected the Administrative application the following view is presented, where it is possibleto select the Date option in the Operator menu.
Figure 294. Administrative application – Date selection
Figure 295. is presented.The current Date of the NE and the Time zone can only be checked in the view.Please refer to the previous chapters of this Handbook for the NE Time Management.
Figure 295. Administrative – Date
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
308
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
5.7.2.4 Mediation Function
The Mediation Function is used when it is necessary to manage non–SDH equipment by means of theQ2 interface.To activate the mediation function it is necessary to compile the MF configuration table as described inpara. 5.7.2.2.3 on page 304.
After enabling the MF function, in the Alarm Synthesis view is presented a string representing the QB2Network Element management interface (virtual Mediation Function) of the QB3 Network Element ( seeFigure 296. ).The string is indicated with the acronym “ADM MF” and the version number (in the example of the figure“ADM MF 30”).
Click on it and select the ”Application Choice ” to enter the list of applications referred to the mediationfunction.The available applications, described in the next paragraphs, are those reported in Figure 297.
At the end of the procedure each non–SDH equipment will be represented by a proper string in the AlarmSynthesis window: clicking on the equipment name it will be possible to access the relevant applications.For the Application description of the non–SDH equipment refer to the relevant handbook.
Virtual Mediation Function string
Figure 296. Mediation Function selection
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
309
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
Figure 297. Application choice for Mediation Function
5.7.2.4.1 Mediation Function: alarms, status and control application
Figure 298. represents the alarms, status and control application screen.
The screen shows the status of the two Operative Systems (if any), indicating the one (the ”OS Main” orthe ”OS Spare” ) managing the Mediation Function of the NE.
The labels at the top of the AS&C screen indicate alarm information referred to the NE Mediation Function.Only the AE and the OS isolation alarms are active. The OS severity is fixed to NG, therefore the AT, UGand IND alarms are meaningless.
Figure 298. Mediation Function: alarms, status and control application
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
310
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
5.7.2.5 Mediation Function: local configuration application
This application is used to configure the data necessary to manage the NE with Q2 interface.
Figure 299. shows the local configuration table list :
• OS configuration table• Local Q2 interface definition• Slave NE address configuration table
Each of the above tables will be detailed in the paragraphs that follow.
Figure 299. Mediation Function: local configuration application list
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
311
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
5.7.2.5.1 OS configuration table
The screen of Figure 300. is dedicated to the MAIN and SPARE OS Local Address.
The two OSs (main and spare) that manage the “QB3 NE virtual Mediation Function” can be different fromthose managing the QB3 NE or the “QB3 NE virtual Transmission” .Therefore their addresses might differ.
The OS NSAP address is composed by:
– Area address– System ID
At the bottom of the screen the table defines the switch condition between Main and Spare OS:
• enable / disable the Automatic Switch – Over• enable / disable Automatic Switch – Back
The ”switch over” option set at ”Yes” enables the spare OS connection when the main OS is no more active.If the main OS returns to the active status and the switch back parameter is set to Yes , the dialogueswitches to the main OS.The ”switch over” parameter set to “no” prevents the spare OS connection in case of OS main connectionfailure.The ”switch back” option set to “no” prevents the switch between spare and main OS from being revertive.
Figure 300. Mediation Function: OS configuration table
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
312
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
5.7.2.5.2 Local Q2 interface definition
The screen of Figure 301. permits to set the following data for the Mediation Function interface:
• Line Speed:– For Q2 synchronous intermediate system the line speed is fixed at 19200 bit/s– For RQ2 asynchronous intermediate system the line speed is selectable
• Intermediate System: select between Q2 (synchronous ) or RQ2 ( asynchronous ) protocolsdepending on the type of connected Q2 NE.
Figure 301. Mediation Function: Local Q2 interface definition
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
313
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
5.7.2.5.3 Slave NE address configuration table
This table permits to select the non–SDH equipment with Q2 interface belonging to the network beingmanaged by the Operator (see Figure 302. ).
Figure 302. Mediation Function: NE selection
The total capacity of a single NE ( i.e. maximum number of Q2 elements that a Q2 interface can manage)is:
• physical load: max 128 physical addresses
• logical load : max 128 logical addresses ( 7.1 )
Restriction: the memory required to store the alarm retrieved from each Q2 NE is 25 kbyte in total.Therefore, due to the different weight of the various type of Q2 NE, the max. number of Q2 NEs managedcan be lower than 128.
For each non–SDH equipment is available a proper string in the Alarm Synthesis window.Clicking on the equipment name it is possible to access to the relevant Applications.
N.B. To be able to open a remote session on a Q2 NE , the Craft Terminal SWP of the Q2 NE mustbe installed on the same directory in which NECTAS has been installed.
The table in Figure 303. allows the user to configure the slave NEs. The table contains 128 entries, eachof them describing one slave NE. For each entry the user can configure the following information:
• 7.1 Address ( logical address ). The same ”Secondary Address” value assigned on the “Networkconfiguration” procedure, presented in the Operator’s Handbook of the QB3* NE.
• NE enabling.
• Address Q2 ( physical address ). It is the physical address of the Q2 link (values from 1 to 254)A max of 128 different Q2 addresses can be obtained.
• Mode. Select between ”Standard” or ”Enhanced” protocol.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
314
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
Figure 303. Mediation Function: Slave NE address configuration table
5.7.2.6 Mediation Function: administrative application
The Administrative application is used for the station operators management.
It is the same application described in the Operator’s handbook of the QB3* NE, except the Date Changepresented at para. 5.7.2.3.1 on page 307.
The contents of the Administrative application is shared between the Mediation Function (ADM MF) andthe virtual Transmission part (ADM TH or ADM TL) of the NE so that changes operated in this point modifyalso the content of the Administrative application of the NE.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
315
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
5.8 Slave NE Management
The Slave NE management is applicable to the 1540PO Info Model Network Element.
The 1540PO acts as a master Network Element and it hosts the Info model of one or more slave 1540NTNetwork Elements connected to it.
In this chapter are described the differences in the operative sequence and in the Menus relevant to theSlave NE management. For all the common functions the information of the previous chapter is valid.
5.8.1 Create Slave NE
Operating as instructed in the previous chapter:
– Open the NES view
– Create the Map and the 1540PO Network Element
The 1540PO is presented in the view as for the following example
Extras
Figure 304. Map with master NE
Create a slave NE by selecting the Master NE and then the Create Slave NE option of the NE Directorypull down menu as in the following figure.
This option is only present in the menu when selecting a Master NE.
NB: before creating a new slave NE login to the Master NE to create the board which manages the Slave NE
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
316
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.Extras
Figure 305. Create slave NE
At this point a new window (see next figure) asks to select a Slave NE index, numbered 1 to n ( n dependsby the NE Release, fro example in 1540PO Release 2.3 n=52 ). A not already used index value must beselected.
Extras
Figure 306. Select Slave NE index
Select and click OK”, then the user has to indicate the “release type of Slave NE” to be selected in a newscreen (the list of allowed Slave NE types for a specific Master NE is presented to the user).
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
317
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
See the example of the following figure.
Extras
Figure 307. Select Slave NE type release
Click OK to complete the slave NE creation.
A new ”Submap” containing the Master NE and the Slave NE is automatically created (only if not alreadyexisting with Slave NE previously created). See the example of next figure.
In this Submap (named “Master NE“ as default) the Master NE and Slave NE are represented at the samelevel.
The submap is created to represent the alarm synthesis related to the master and its slaves.
Note: the “user label” of the created Slave NE is computed adding to the “Master NE user Label” the ” SlaveNE index number”.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
318
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
Figure 308. Slave NE creation in the Map
With the same procedure it is possible to add other Slave NEs to the Submap, as in the following example.
Figure 309. Example of Slave NEs creation in the Map
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
319
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
5.8.2 Delete Slave NE
To remove a Slave NE select the same Slave NE in the NES view and then the Delete Slave NE optionof the NE Directory pull down menu, as for the following figure.
This option is only present in the menu when selecting a Slave NE.
Figure 310. Remove Slave NE
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
320
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
Slave NE deletion entails its removing.
If the removed Slave NE is the only one in the Submap, the same Submap is cancelled from the Map,presenting only the Master NE. See the example of next figure.
Figure 311. After deleting the only one Slave NE in a Submap
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
321
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
5.8.3 Master NE Supervision
To supervise select the Master NE or the “Submap” containing it and then the Start option of theSupervision pull down menu, as for the following figure.
In this way it is possible to recognize if the Master NE is hosting some Slave NEs.
The supervision state of a Slave NE is got from its master; it is not possible to start the supervision on asingle slave.
Extras
Figure 312. Master NE Start Supervision
If the map is saved also the Slave NEs representation is saved.In any case when a new start supervision is requested on the Master NE, all the present slaves arereconsidered; it means that, for example, they are removed from the map if the master does not host SlaveNEs when the supervision is started. This can happen when a Slave NE is deleted, also from another CraftTerminal.If the resulting recognition reports that no Slave NE are hosted, the container object (Submap ”Master NE”)is removed.
After the Start of the Supervision the operator can login the Master NE and/or the Slave NE.
To terminate the Supervision select the Master NE or the “Submap” in which it is contained and then theStop option of the Supervision pull down menu, as for the following figure.
When the supervision is stopped on the Master NE the Slave NEs also go to unsupervised state.It is not possible to stop the supervision on a single slave.
As a result of the stop supervision, all the NE icons inside the “Master NE” submap are represented asin the following figure.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
322
01
957.140.042 N
/3AL 79551 AA AA
322
322
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
Extras
Figure 313. Master NE Stop Supervision
As a result of the stop supervision, all the NE icons inside the “Master NE” submap are represented asin the following figure.
Extras
Figure 314. Stop Supervision result
END OF DOCUMENT
957.140.042 N Ed.01 3AL 79551 AAAA Ed.01
Basic Operator’s Handbook
Alcatel 1320CTElement Management Craft Terminal
Version 3.x
957.140.042 N Ed.01 3AL 79551 AAAA Ed.01
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
Y 1
01
957.140.042 TQZZA
RELEASED
/3AL 79551 AAAA TQZZA
4
4
QUESTA PAGINA NON VA INSERITA NEL MANUALETHIS PAGE MUST NOT BE INCLUDED IN THE HANDBOOK
COD.MANUALE HDBK P/N: 957.140.042 N Ed.01 3AL 79551 AAAA Ed.01
Alcatel 1320CT Version 3.x BASIC OPERATOR’S HANDBOOK ORIGINALE INTERLEAF: FILE ARCHIVIAZIONE: cod ANV (PD1-PD2)
– No PAGINE TOTALI PER ARCHIVIAZIONE: 324+4=328– DIMENSIONE BINDER SORGENTE (du –ks): 243.512 kBytes
INFORMAZIONI PER IL CENTRO STAMPA - ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS
– STAMPARE FRONTE/RETRO RECTO-VERSO PRINTING
– COMPOSIZIONE ED ASSIEMAGGIO DEL MANUALE:HANDBOOK COMPOSITION AND ASSEMBLY:
fasestep
No pagine(facciate)
numeratenumbered
step (facciate)No pages da from a to
1 TARGHETTE - LABELS
2 FRONTESPIZIO - FRONT 2 1/2 2/2
3 HANDBOOK 322 1/322 322/322
TOTALE PAGINE A4 (FACCIATE) TOTAL A4 PAGES: 324
TOTALE FOGLI A4 TOTAL A4 SHEETS: 162
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
Y 2
01
957.140.042 TQZZA
RELEASED
/3AL 79551 AAAA TQZZA
4
4
QUESTA PAGINA NON VA INSERITA NEL MANUALETHIS PAGE MUST NOT BE INCLUDED IN THE HANDBOOK
WARNING FOR A-UNITS OTHER THAN A-ITALY
• Labels are done according to A-Italy binder format.• Source file ALICE 6.10
FCGSite
Originators
VIMERCATE
:
Domain
1320CT
Division
VERSIONS 3.X
Rubric
OPERATOR’S HANDBOOK
TypeDistribution Codes Internal External
::::
ONDSDH1320CT1320CT BASIC OPERATOR’S HANDBOOK
:
P.GHELFI
Approvals
NameApp.
App.Name
P. SARDO
R. ROMUALDI G. ZANGRANDO
C. FAVERO
INFORMAZIONI EDITORIALI
– ORIGINALE SU FILE: ALICE 6.10• sistemazione ’figlist’
957.140.042 N Ed.01 3AL 79551 AAAA Ed.013AL 79551 AAAA Ed.01
01
Alcatel 1320CTVersion 3.x
Element Management Craft Terminal
BASIC OPERATOR’S HANDBOOK
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
Y 3
01
957.140.042 TQZZA
RELEASED
/3AL 79551 AAAA TQZZA
4
4
Alcatel 1320CT Version 3.x
Element Management Craft Terminal
BASIC OPERATOR’S HANDBOOK
957.140.042 N Ed.01 3AL 79551 AAAA Ed.01
VOL.1/1
Alcatel 1320CT Version 3.x
Element Management Craft Terminal
BASIC OPERATOR’S HANDBOOK
957.140.042 N Ed.01 3AL 79551 AAAA Ed.01
VOL.1/1
Alcatel 1320CT Version 3.x
Element Management Craft Terminal
957.140.042 N Ed.01 3AL 79551 AAAA Ed.01 BASIC OPERATOR’S HANDBOOK VOL.1/1
Alcatel 1320CT Version 3.xElement Management Craft Terminal
957.140.042 N Ed.01 3AL 79551 AAAA Ed.01 BASIC OPERATOR’S HANDBOOK VOL.1/1
Alcatel 1320CT Version 3.x
Element Management Craft Terminal
957.140.042 N Ed.01 3AL 79551 AAAA Ed.01 BASIC OPERATOR’S HANDBOOK VOL.1/1
All
right
s re
serv
ed. P
assi
ng o
n an
d co
pyin
g of
this
docu
men
t, us
e an
d co
mm
unic
atio
n of
its
cont
ents
not p
erm
itted
with
out w
ritte
n au
thor
izat
ion
from
Alc
atel
.
ED
1AA
000
14 0
004
(900
7) A
4 –
ALI
CE
04.
10
Y 4
01
957.140.042 TQZZA
RELEASED
/3AL 79551 AAAA TQZZA
4
4
END OF DOCUMENT